Siemens MP277 Manual

Siemens MP277 Manual
Preface
SIMATIC HMI HMI device MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
SIMATIC HMI
HMI device
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
1
Overview
______________
Safety instructions and
approvals
2
______________
3
Planning application
______________
4
Mounting and connecting
______________
Operator controls and
displays
Operating Instructions
5
______________
Configuring the operating
system
6
______________
7
Commissioning a project
______________
8
Operating a project
______________
9
Operating alarms
______________
10
Operating recipes
______________
11
Maintenance and care
______________
12
Technical specifications
______________
A
Appendix
______________
Order No. 6AV6691-1DJ01-0AB0
03/2009
A5E02479740-01
B
Abbreviations
______________
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Ordernumber: 6AV6691-1DJ01-0AB0
Ⓟ 03/2009
Copyright © Siemens AG 2009.
Technical data subject to change
Preface
Purpose of the operating instructions
These operating instructions provide information for manuals derived from the requirements
for mechanical engineering documentation according to DIN EN 62079. This information
relates to the place of use, transport, storage, mounting, use and maintenance.
These operating instructions are intended for:
● Users
● Commissioning engineers
● Maintenance personnel
Pay particular attention to the section "Safety Instructions (Page 31)".
The help integrated in WinCC flexible, the WinCC flexible Information System, contains
detailed information. The information system contains instructions, examples and reference
information in electronic form.
Required knowledge
General knowledge of automation technology and process communication is needed to
understand the operating instructions.
It is also assumed that those using the operating instructions have experience with personal
computers and knowledge of Microsoft operating systems.
Scope of the operating instructions
The operating instructions apply to the HMI device MP 277 in conjunction with the software
package WinCC flexible.
Position in the information landscape
These operating instructions form part of the SIMATIC HMI documentation. You can obtain
an overview of SIMATIC hardware and SIMATIC software products and SIMATIC systems
and information that can be called up in PDF format in various languages at the following
address:
"http://www.automation.siemens.com/simatic/portal/html_76/techdoku.htm"
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
3
Preface
Conventions
The following text notation will facilitate reading this manual:
Notation
Scope
"Add screen"
•
•
•
Terminology that appears in the user interface, for example
dialog names, tabs, buttons, menu commands
Required input, for example, limits, tag values.
Path information
"File > Edit"
Operational sequences, for example, menu commands, shortcut
menu commands.
<F1>, <Alt+P>
Keyboard operation
Please observe notes labeled as follows:
Note
A note contains important information about the product and its use or a specific section of
the manual to which you should pay particular attention.
Illustrations in this manual
This manual contains illustrations of the described devices. The illustrations may differ from
devices actually delivered.
Trademarks
The following designations marked with the symbol ® are registered trademarks of
Siemens AG:
● HMI®
● SIMATIC®
● WinCC®
● SIMATIC MP 277®
4
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Preface
Additional information
You can find additional information about products described in the manual under "Contact"
in the following table:
Request
Contact
Contact persons and office locations
"http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner"
Additional technical documentation
"http://www.automation.siemens.com/portal/index.htm"
Training Center
"http://sitrain.automation.siemens.com/sitrain/"
Technical Support
"http://support.automation.siemens.com"
Online support request form
"http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request"
Service
"http://www.siemens.com/automation/service"
Recycling and disposal
The HMI devices described in these operating instructions can be recycled due to the low
levels of pollutants. Contact a certified disposal service company for environmentally sound
recycling and disposal of your old devices.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
5
Preface
6
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1
2
3
4
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 13
1.1
Product overview .........................................................................................................................13
1.2
Design of the HMI Device MP 277 8" Touch ...............................................................................14
1.3
Design of the HMI Device MP 277 8" Key ...................................................................................16
1.4
Design of the HMI Device MP 277 10" Touch .............................................................................18
1.5
Design of the HMI Device MP 277 10" Key .................................................................................20
1.6
Accessory kit ................................................................................................................................22
1.7
Accessories..................................................................................................................................23
1.8
The HMI device in the operating process ....................................................................................25
1.9
Functional Scope with WinCC flexible .........................................................................................26
1.10
Software options ..........................................................................................................................28
1.11
Communications ..........................................................................................................................29
Safety instructions and approvals ............................................................................................................ 31
2.1
Safety Instructions .......................................................................................................................31
2.2
Standards, certificates and approvals..........................................................................................32
2.3
Notes about usage.......................................................................................................................34
2.4
Electromagnetic compatibility ......................................................................................................35
2.5
Transport and storage conditions ................................................................................................37
Planning application................................................................................................................................. 39
3.1
Notes about usage.......................................................................................................................39
3.2
Mounting positions .......................................................................................................................41
3.3
Preparing for Mounting ................................................................................................................42
3.4
Specifications for Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection..........................44
3.5
Rated voltages .............................................................................................................................44
Mounting and connecting......................................................................................................................... 45
4.1
Checking the package contents...................................................................................................45
4.2
Mounting the HMI Device.............................................................................................................46
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
Connecting the HMI device..........................................................................................................49
Overview ......................................................................................................................................49
Ports.............................................................................................................................................50
Connecting the equipotential bonding circuit ...............................................................................51
Connecting the Power Supply......................................................................................................53
Connecting the PLC.....................................................................................................................55
Connecting a Configuring PC ......................................................................................................58
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
7
Table of contents
5
6
8
4.3.7
4.3.8
Connecting a USB device ........................................................................................................... 61
Connecting a Printer. .................................................................................................................. 62
4.4
Switching on and Testing the HMI device................................................................................... 63
4.5
Securing the cables..................................................................................................................... 64
Operator controls and displays ................................................................................................................ 65
5.1
Front operator controls................................................................................................................ 65
5.2
Using Memory Cards with the HMI Device ................................................................................. 67
5.3
Labeling the Function Keys at the MP 277 Key.......................................................................... 69
Configuring the operating system ............................................................................................................ 73
6.1
Loader ......................................................................................................................................... 73
6.2
Setting up and disabling SecureMode ........................................................................................ 77
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.3.1
6.3.3.2
6.3.3.3
Control Panel .............................................................................................................................. 78
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 78
Reference for functions ............................................................................................................... 79
Operating the Control Panel ....................................................................................................... 81
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 81
Input with the Touch Screen ....................................................................................................... 82
Input with the Keyboard .............................................................................................................. 84
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
Changing settings for operation .................................................................................................. 88
Configuring the Screen Keyboard............................................................................................... 88
Setting the Character Repetition of the Keyboard ...................................................................... 89
Setting the Double-click .............................................................................................................. 91
Calibrating the Touch Screen ..................................................................................................... 92
6.5
Changing Password Protection................................................................................................... 94
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.4
6.6.5
6.6.6
6.6.7
6.6.8
6.6.9
6.6.10
Changing HMI device settings .................................................................................................... 95
Setting the Date and Time .......................................................................................................... 95
Changing Regional Settings ....................................................................................................... 97
Backing up Registry Information ................................................................................................. 98
Changing monitor settings .......................................................................................................... 99
Setting the screen saver ........................................................................................................... 100
Changing the Printer Properties................................................................................................ 102
Set the volume .......................................................................................................................... 103
Restarting the HMI Device ........................................................................................................ 105
Displaying Information about the HMI Device........................................................................... 106
Displaying System Properties ................................................................................................... 107
6.7
Setting the Delay Time.............................................................................................................. 108
6.8
Setting the uninterruptible power supply................................................................................... 109
6.9
State of uninterruptible power supply........................................................................................ 111
6.10
6.10.1
6.10.2
6.10.3
Change the communication settings......................................................................................... 112
Changing S7 transfer settings................................................................................................... 112
Configuring the data channel .................................................................................................... 115
Enabling PROFINET IO ............................................................................................................ 117
6.11
6.11.1
6.11.2
6.11.3
Configuring network operation .................................................................................................. 119
Overview of network operation ................................................................................................. 119
Setting the device name of the HMI device .............................................................................. 121
Changing the Network Configuration ........................................................................................ 122
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Table of contents
7
8
6.11.4
6.11.5
6.11.6
6.11.6.1
6.11.6.2
6.11.6.3
6.11.6.4
Changing the Logon Data ..........................................................................................................124
Changing E-Mail Settings ..........................................................................................................125
Changing internet settings .........................................................................................................126
Changing General Internet Settings ..........................................................................................126
Setting the Proxy Server ............................................................................................................127
Changing Privacy Settings.........................................................................................................128
Importing and Deleting Certificates............................................................................................129
6.12
Saving to external storage device (backup)...............................................................................131
6.13
Restoring from external storage device .....................................................................................133
6.14
Activate Memory Management ..................................................................................................136
Commissioning a project ....................................................................................................................... 137
7.1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................137
7.2
Operating modes .......................................................................................................................138
7.3
Using existing projects ...............................................................................................................139
7.4
Data Transmission Options........................................................................................................140
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.5.4
7.5.5
Transfer......................................................................................................................................141
Overview ....................................................................................................................................141
Starting manual transfer.............................................................................................................141
Starting automatic transfer.........................................................................................................142
Starting backtransfer..................................................................................................................144
Testing a project ........................................................................................................................145
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
Backup and restore....................................................................................................................146
Overview ....................................................................................................................................146
Backup and restore using WinCC flexible .................................................................................147
Backup and restore using ProSave ...........................................................................................149
7.7
7.7.1
7.7.2
7.7.3
7.7.4
Updating the operating system ..................................................................................................151
Overview ....................................................................................................................................151
Resetting factory settings...........................................................................................................152
Updating the Operating System using WinCC flexible ..............................................................152
Updating the Operating System using ProSave ........................................................................154
7.8
7.8.1
7.8.2
7.8.3
Installing and removing options .................................................................................................155
Overview ....................................................................................................................................155
Installing and removing options using WinCC flexible ...............................................................155
Installing and removing options using ProSave.........................................................................157
7.9
7.9.1
7.9.2
Transferring and transferring back license keys ........................................................................158
Overview ....................................................................................................................................158
Transferring and transferring back license keys ........................................................................159
Operating a project ................................................................................................................................ 161
8.1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................161
8.2
Direct keys .................................................................................................................................164
8.3
Setting the project language ......................................................................................................165
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
Entering values using the touch screen.....................................................................................166
Overview ....................................................................................................................................166
Entering and Editing Numerical Values .....................................................................................167
Entering and editing alphanumerical values ..............................................................................170
Entering the date and time.........................................................................................................172
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
9
Table of contents
9
10
8.4.5
8.4.6
Entering Symbolic Values ......................................................................................................... 172
Displaying Infotext..................................................................................................................... 173
8.5
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.5
8.5.6
8.5.7
8.5.8
8.5.9
Entering values using the keys ................................................................................................. 174
Control keys .............................................................................................................................. 174
Example: Enter characters using the alphanumeric keyboard ................................................. 176
Function keys ............................................................................................................................ 177
General procedures .................................................................................................................. 177
Entering and editing numerical values ...................................................................................... 178
Entering and editing alphanumerical values ............................................................................. 179
Entering the date and time ........................................................................................................ 180
Entering Symbolic Values ......................................................................................................... 180
Displaying Infotext..................................................................................................................... 181
8.6
Bar and gauge........................................................................................................................... 182
8.7
Operating the switch ................................................................................................................. 183
8.8
Operating the Slider Control ..................................................................................................... 184
8.9
Operating the Trend View ......................................................................................................... 186
8.10
8.10.1
8.10.2
8.10.3
Operating the status force......................................................................................................... 188
Overview ................................................................................................................................... 188
Touch operation ........................................................................................................................ 189
Key control ................................................................................................................................ 191
8.11
8.11.1
8.11.2
8.11.3
Operating the [email protected] view............................................................................................... 193
Overview ................................................................................................................................... 193
Touch operation ........................................................................................................................ 194
Key control ................................................................................................................................ 195
8.12
8.12.1
8.12.2
8.12.3
8.12.4
8.12.5
8.12.5.1
8.12.5.2
8.12.6
8.12.6.1
8.12.6.2
8.12.7
Project security.......................................................................................................................... 197
Overview ................................................................................................................................... 197
User view .................................................................................................................................. 198
User logon................................................................................................................................. 200
User logoff................................................................................................................................. 201
Creating users........................................................................................................................... 202
Creating users with touch operation ......................................................................................... 202
Creating users with key operation............................................................................................. 203
Changing user data................................................................................................................... 206
Changing user data with touch operation ................................................................................. 206
Changing user data with key operation..................................................................................... 207
Deleting users ........................................................................................................................... 208
8.13
Closing the project .................................................................................................................... 208
Operating alarms ................................................................................................................................... 209
9.1
Overview ................................................................................................................................... 209
9.2
Recognizing Pending Alarms.................................................................................................... 211
9.3
Displaying alarms...................................................................................................................... 212
9.4
Display infotexts for an alarm.................................................................................................... 214
9.5
Acknowledge alarm................................................................................................................... 215
9.6
Edit alarm .................................................................................................................................. 216
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Table of contents
10
Operating recipes .................................................................................................................................. 217
10.1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................217
10.2
Structure of a recipe...................................................................................................................218
10.3
Recipes in the project ................................................................................................................220
10.4
Displaying a recipe.....................................................................................................................222
10.5
Recipe values in the HMI device and the PLC ..........................................................................225
10.6
10.6.1
10.6.2
10.6.3
10.6.4
10.6.5
10.6.6
10.6.7
Operating the recipe view ..........................................................................................................226
Overview ....................................................................................................................................226
Creating a recipe data record ....................................................................................................227
Editing a recipe data record .......................................................................................................229
Deleting a recipe data record.....................................................................................................230
Synchronizing tags.....................................................................................................................231
Reading a recipe data record from the PLC ..............................................................................232
Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC ............................................................................234
10.7
10.7.1
10.7.2
10.7.3
10.7.4
10.7.5
10.7.6
Operating the simple recipe view...............................................................................................235
Overview ....................................................................................................................................235
Creating a recipe data record ....................................................................................................237
Editing a recipe data record .......................................................................................................238
Deleting a recipe data record.....................................................................................................239
Reading a recipe data record from the PLC ..............................................................................240
Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC ............................................................................241
10.8
Exporting a recipe data record...................................................................................................242
10.9
Importing a recipe data record ...................................................................................................243
10.10
Examples ...................................................................................................................................244
10.10.1 Entering a recipe data record.....................................................................................................244
10.10.2 Manual production sequence.....................................................................................................245
11
12
Maintenance and care ........................................................................................................................... 247
11.1
Maintenance and care ...............................................................................................................247
11.2
Clean screen on MP 277 Touch ................................................................................................248
11.3
Spare Parts and Repairs............................................................................................................248
Technical specifications......................................................................................................................... 249
12.1
12.1.1
12.1.2
12.1.3
12.1.4
Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................249
Dimension drawings of the MP 277 8" Touch............................................................................249
Dimension drawings of the MP 277 8" Key................................................................................251
Dimension Drawings of the MP 277 10" Touch .........................................................................252
Dimension drawings of the MP 277 10" Key..............................................................................254
12.2
12.2.1
12.2.2
Specifications .............................................................................................................................255
Specifications of the MP 277 Touch ..........................................................................................255
Specifications of the MP 277 Key ..............................................................................................256
12.3
Bit assignment of the direct keys ...............................................................................................258
12.4
12.4.1
12.4.2
12.4.3
12.4.4
Description of the ports ..............................................................................................................260
Power supply..............................................................................................................................260
X10/IF 1B (RS 422/RS 485).......................................................................................................260
X20, X21 (USB) .........................................................................................................................261
X1 (Ethernet/LAN)......................................................................................................................261
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
11
Table of contents
A
B
Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 263
A.1
ESD guideline ........................................................................................................................... 263
A.2
System alarms .......................................................................................................................... 265
Abbreviations......................................................................................................................................... 289
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 291
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 297
12
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
1
Overview
1.1
Product overview
Possible applications of the MP 277
The Multi Panel MP 277 units are an extension of the 270 series.
The HMI devices are based on the innovative standard operating system, Microsoft
Windows CE 5.0. The Multi Panel MP 277 units belong to the "Multifunctional Platform"
product category. The HMI devices offer enhanced communication options to the office
world. The Pocket Internet Explorer is already installed on the HMI devices.
The MP 277 offers a variety of application uses, high performance and a favorable
cost/performance ratio.
The devices are equipped with:
● PROFIBUS port
● Ethernet port for connection to PROFINET
● 2 USB ports
● TFT screen with up to 64k color
Thanks to the wide range of devices, you get to use the device that is suited to you.
In addition to the classic HMI application WinCC flexible, the HMI devices also support
additional applications, for example:
● [email protected][email protected]
● OPC server
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
13
Overview
1.2 Design of the HMI Device MP 277 8" Touch
1.2
Design of the HMI Device MP 277 8" Touch
Front view and side view
①
Oblong holes for mounting clamps
②
Slot for a memory card
③
Display / touch screen
④
Mounting seal
Bottom view
14
①
Oblong holes for mounting clamps
②
Interfaces
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Overview
1.2 Design of the HMI Device MP 277 8" Touch
Rear view
①
Rating plate
②
Slot for a memory card
③
DIP switch
④
Interface name
⑤
Fixing elements for strain relief
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
15
Overview
1.3 Design of the HMI Device MP 277 8" Key
1.3
Design of the HMI Device MP 277 8" Key
Front view and side view
①
Slot for a memory card
②
Display
③
Oblong holes for mounting clamps
④
Mounting seal
Bottom view
16
①
Oblong holes for a mounting clamp
②
Interfaces
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Overview
1.3 Design of the HMI Device MP 277 8" Key
Rear view
①
Rating plate
②
Slot for a memory card
③
DIP switch
④
Interface name
⑤
Fixing elements for strain relief
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
17
Overview
1.4 Design of the HMI Device MP 277 10" Touch
1.4
Design of the HMI Device MP 277 10" Touch
Front view and side view
①
Slot for a memory card
②
Display / touch screen
③
Oblong holes for mounting clamps
④
Mounting seal
Bottom view
18
①
Interfaces
②
Oblong holes for mounting clamps
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Overview
1.4 Design of the HMI Device MP 277 10" Touch
Rear view
①
Rating plate
②
Slot for a memory card
③
DIP switch
④
Interface name
⑤
Fixing elements for strain relief
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
19
Overview
1.5 Design of the HMI Device MP 277 10" Key
1.5
Design of the HMI Device MP 277 10" Key
Front view and side view
①
Slot for a memory card
②
Display
③
Oblong holes for a mounting clamp
④
Mounting seal
Bottom view
20
①
Interfaces
②
Oblong holes for a mounting clamp
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Overview
1.5 Design of the HMI Device MP 277 10" Key
Rear view
①
Rating plate
②
Slot for a memory card
③
DIP switch
④
Interface name
⑤
Fixing elements for strain relief
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
21
Overview
1.6 Accessory kit
1.6
Accessory kit
The accessory kit contains the following:
● Mains terminal for the power supply
● Mounting clamps for mounting the HMI device
Additional documents may be enclosed with the accessory kit.
Mounting clamps
Spring clamps or metal mounting clamps are provided for mounting. The mounting clamps
hook into oblong holes on the HMI device. The main dimensions of the HMI device are not
exceeded by this.
Spring clamp
Metal mounting clamp
① Slot
① Threaded pin
② Hook
② Hook
A product information with notes on mounting of the HMI device with mounting clamps is
supplied with the HMI device.
The product information is available in the Internet at the following links:
● Product Information "Metal mounting clamp":
"http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/34915725"
● Product Information "Spring clamp":
"http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/34916893"
22
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Overview
1.7 Accessories
1.7
Accessories
Accessories are not included in the product package of the HMI device, but can ordered in
the Internet at "http://mall.automation.siemens.com".
Converter RS 422-RS 232
The converter is required for the connection of controllers of other manufacturers. Connect
the RS 422 to RS 232 converter to the RS 422 / RS 485 interface. The converter converts
the input signals to RS-232 signals.
Order number: 6AV6 671-8XE00-0AX0
PC/PPI cable
You need the cable to update the operating system with reset to factory settings. You can
also use the cable for data transfer. Connect the PC/PPI cable to the RS 422/RS 485 port.
The cable converts the input signals to RS-232 signals.
Order number: 6ES7 901-3CB30-0XA0
Note
Set a lower bit rate if the connection is lost during the operating system update. If you use a
high bit rates, you need to use PC/PPI cable version 3 or higher. The version code is printed
on the cable ("E stand 3," for example, corresponds to version 3).
90° elbow adapter
If space is limited, you can use an elbow adapter at the RS 422/RS 485 interface.
Order number: 6AV6 671-8XD00-0AX0
Protective foil
The protective foil prevents the touch screen from being scratched.
Protective foil is available under the following order numbers:
Protective foil HMI device
Order number
MP 277 8" Touch
6AV6671-3CC00-0AX0
MP 277 10" Touch
6AV6671-3DC00-0AX0
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
23
Overview
1.7 Accessories
Clamping frame
IP65 degree of protection or enclosure type 4X/type 12 can be achieved with a clamping
frame even with little material thickness at the mounting cut-out. For additional information,
see Section Preparing for Mounting (Page 42).
Clamping frames are available with the following order numbers:
Clamping frame for HMI device
Order number
MP 277 8" Touch
6AV6671-3CS00-0AX0
MP 277 8" Key
6AV6671-3CS01-0AX0
MP 277 10" Touch
6AV6671-8XS00-0AX0
Memory card
Only use SD memory cards, CF memory cards or MultiMediaCards tested and approved by
Siemens AG.
Service pack
Content of the service package for all HMI devices:
● Mounting seals
● Mounting clamps
● Power supply terminal, 2-pin
Order number: 6AV6671-3XA01-0AX1
24
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Overview
1.8 The HMI device in the operating process
1.8
The HMI device in the operating process
The HMI device is part of the operating process. The following two phases are key to the
way the HMI device is integrated in the operating process:
● Project design
● Process management
Project design
Visualization of the operating process is known as project design. Project design comprises:
● writing project data
● saving project data
● testing project data
● simulating project data
Project design is undertaken independently of the HMI device and results in a project. Once
this has been generated, the project can be transferred to the HMI device to control the
operating process.
&RQILJXULQJ3&
+0,GHYLFH
Process management
Process management is marked by two-way communication between HMI device and
controller. This lays the foundations for operator control and monitoring.
&RQWURO
&RQWURO
+0,GHYLFH
The operator can intervene in the operating process on the HMI device for control purposes.
The controller in turn supplies the results of the operating process which are displayed on
the HMI device.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
25
Overview
1.9 Functional Scope with WinCC flexible
1.9
Functional Scope with WinCC flexible
The following tables show the objects that can be integrated in a project for an MP 277.
Messages
Object
Specification
MP 277
Messages
Number of discrete alarms
4 000
Number of analog alarms
200
Length of the alarm text
80 characters
Number of tags in an alarm
Max. 8
Display
Alarm line, Alarm
window, Alarm view
Acknowledge error alarm individually
Acknowledge multiple error alarms simultaneously
(group acknowledgement)
Yes
16 alarm groups
Edit alarm
Yes
Alarm indicator
Yes
ALARM_S
Display S7 alarms
Alarm buffer,
retentive
Alarm buffer capacity
Yes
512 alarms
Simultaneously queued alarm events
Max. 250
View alarm
Yes
Delete alarm buffer
Yes
Print alarm by line
Yes
Tags, values and lists
Object
Specification
MP 277
Tags
Number
Limit monitoring
Input/output
Yes
Linear scaling
Input/output
Yes
Text lists
Number
500 1)
Graphics lists
Number
400 1)
1)
2 048
The maximum total of text and graphics lists is 500.
Screens
Object
Specification
Screens
Number
500
Fields per screen
200
Tags per screen
200
Complex objects per screen (for example, bars)
10
Template
26
MP 277
Yes
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Overview
1.9 Functional Scope with WinCC flexible
Recipes
Object
Specification
MP 277
Recipes
Number
300
Data records per recipe
500
Entries per recipe
1 000
Recipe memory
Storage location
1)
64 KB
•
•
•
Memory card 1)
USB memory stick 1)
Network drive
The number of recipe data records might be restricted by the capacity of the storage
medium.
Logs
Note
The HMI devices are suitable for the logging of relatively small volumes of data.
Manage the data in several adjacent archives in a segmented circular log. The use of a large
circular log has a negative effect on performance.
Object
Specification
Logs
Number of logs
MP 277
20
Number of partial logs in a segmented circular log
400
Entries per log
1)
10 000
Filing format
•
CSV with ANSI
character set
Storage location
•
•
•
Memory card 1)
USB memory stick 1)
Network drive
The number of entries in the log may be restricted by the capacity of the storage
medium.
Safety
Object
Specification
Safety
Number of user groups
50
Number of users
50
Number of authorizations
32
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
MP 277
27
Overview
1.10 Software options
Info texts
Object
Specification
Info texts
Length (no. of characters)
MP 277
320
(depending on font)
For alarms
Yes
For screens
Yes
For screen objects (for example, for I/O field, switch,
button, invisible button)
Yes
Additional functions
Object
Specification
Screen settings
Calibrating the touch screen
MP 277
Yes
1)
Brightness setting
Yes
Language switching
Number of languages
16
VBScript
User-specific extension of the functionality
Yes
Number of scripts
Graphic objects
Vector and pixel graphics
Yes
Trends
Number
300
Scheduler
Number of tasks
Text objects
Number
Direct keys
PROFIBUS DP direct keys
Yes
PROFINET IO direct keys
Yes
1)
1.10
50
48
10 000
Only MP 277 Touch
Software options
The following software options are available for the MP 277:
● [email protected]
The [email protected] option enables you to access a remote HMI device from the HMI
device or PC via Ethernet.
● [email protected]
The [email protected] option enables you to set up communication between different HMI
systems.
● /Audit
The /Audit option extends the HMI device to include functions for recording operations in
an audit trail and electronic signature.
● OPC server (OPC XML)
The OPC-Server option enables you to create communications to OPC-capable
applications from an HMI device or PC via Ethernet.
28
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Overview
1.11 Communications
1.11
Communications
Number of connections
Connection
MP 277
Number using a bus connection
6
Number of connections based on "SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol"
8
Note
In the following cases, you may not enable PROFINET IO in the Control Panel of the HMI
device:
• Use of PLCs from other manufacturers
• Use of SIMATIC 500/505 via NITP
PLCs
The following table shows the PLCs which can be used with the HMI devices and the
protocols or profiles which can be used.
PLC
Protocol
SIMATIC S7
•
•
•
•
PPI
MPI 1)
PROFIBUS DP
TCP/IP (Ethernet)
Yes
SIMATIC S5
•
PROFIBUS DP
Yes
SIMATIC 500/505
•
•
NITP
PROFIBUS DP
Yes
SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol
•
HTTP/HTTPS (Ethernet)
Yes
Allen-Bradley
PLC series SLC500, SLC501, SLC502, SLC503,
SLC504, SLC505, MicroLogix and PLC5/11,
PLC5/20, PLC5/30, PLC5/40, PLC5/60, PLC5/80
• DF1 2) 5)
• DH+ via KF2 module 3)
• DH485 via KF3 module 4)
• DH485 4)
Yes
GE Fanuc Automation
PLC series 90–30, 90–70, VersaMax Micro
• SNP
Yes
LG Industrial Systems (Lucky
Goldstar) / IMO
PLC series GLOFA GM (GM4, GM6 and GM7) /
Series G4, G6 and G7
• Dedicated communication
Yes
Mitsubishi Electric
PLC series MELSEC FX and MELSEC FX0
• FX
Yes
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
MP 277
29
Overview
1.11 Communications
PLC
Protocol
MP 277
Mitsubishi Electric
PLC series MELSEC FX0, FX1n, FX2n, AnA, AnN,
AnS, AnU, QnA and QnAS
• Protocol 4
Yes
OMRON
PLC series SYSMAC C, SYSMAC CV, SYSMAC
CS1, SYSMAC alpha and CP
• Hostlink/Multilink (SYSMAC Way)
Yes
Modicon
(Schneider Automation)
PLC series Modicon 984, TSX Quantum and TSX
Compact
• Modbus RTU 5)
Yes
PLC series Quantum, Momentum, Premium and
Micro
PLC series Compact and 984 via Ethernet bridge
• Modbus TCP/IP (Ethernet)
30
1)
Not possible when connected to S7-212.
2)
Applies to controllers SLC503, SLC504, SLC505, PLC5, MicroLogix
3)
Applies to controllers SLC504, PLC5 over DF1
4)
Applies to controllers SLC500 to SLC 505 and MicroLogix
5)
Only with converter RS 422-RS 232 6AV6 671-8XE00-0AX0 (option)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Safety instructions and approvals
2.1
2
Safety Instructions
Working on the control cabinet
WARNING
Open equipment
The HMI device is open equipment. This means that the HMI device may only be mounted
in housings or cabinets, whereby the device can be operated from the front panel.
The cubicle or cabinet in which the HMI device is installed may only be accessed with a key
or tool and only by trained, authorized personnel.
Dangerous voltage
Opening the cabinet will expose high voltage parts. Contact with these parts could be fatal.
Disconnect the cabinet from the mains before opening it.
Potentially explosive atmospheres
When operating the HMI device in hazardous areas the following warning applies.
WARNING
Explosion Hazard
Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be non-hazardous.
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2.
High frequency radiation
NOTICE
Unintentional operating situations
High frequency radiation, for example, from cellular phones, can trigger unwanted operating
states.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
31
Safety instructions and approvals
2.2 Standards, certificates and approvals
Installation as intended
WARNING
Installation only in machinery that conforms to the machinery directive
Commissioning the HMI device is prohibited until it has been absolutely ensured that the
machine in which the HMI device is to be installed complies with Directive 98/37/EC or
Directive 2006/42/EC as of December 29, 2009.
2.2
Standards, certificates and approvals
Approvals
CAUTION
The following overview shows possible approvals.
The HMI device itself is certified as shown on the label on its rear panel.
CE approval
The automation system meets the general and safety-related requirements of the following
EC directives and conforms to the harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable
logic controllers published in the official gazettes of the European Union:
● 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
● 2006/95/EC "Electrical equipment for use within specific voltage limits"
(Low-Voltage Directive)
EC Declaration of Conformity
The EC Declarations of Conformity are available to the relevant authorities at the following
address:
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
I IA AS R&D DH A
P.O. Box 1963
92209 Amberg
Germany
32
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Safety instructions and approvals
2.2 Standards, certificates and approvals
UL approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., conforming to
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
or
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., conforming to
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
● UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
● CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
Approved for use in
● Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D or
● Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC or
● non-hazardous locations
FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) conforming to
● Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
Approved for use in
● Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4
● Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4
Marking for Australia
The HMI device fulfills the requirements of standard AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).
IEC 61131
The HMI device satisfies the requirements and criteria conforming to IEC 61131-2,
Programmable Logic Controllers, Part 2: Operating resource requirements and tests.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
33
Safety instructions and approvals
2.3 Notes about usage
2.3
Notes about usage
Industrial applications
The HMI device is designed for industrial applications. It conforms to the following standards:
● Requirements for emissions EN 61000-6-4: 2007
● Requirements for interference immunity EN 61000-6-2: 2005
Use in residential areas
Note
The HMI device is not intended for use in residential areas. Operation of an HMI device in
residential areas can have a negative influence on radio/TV reception.
If the HMI device is used in a residential area, you must take measures to achieve Limit
Class B conforming to EN 55011 for RF interference.
Suitable measures for achieving the degree of noise suppression for Limit Class B include,
for example:
● Installation of the HMI device in grounded control cabinets
● Use of filters in electrical supply lines
Individual acceptance is required.
34
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Safety instructions and approvals
2.4 Electromagnetic compatibility
2.4
Electromagnetic compatibility
Introduction
The HMI device fulfills, among other things, the requirements of the EMC law pertaining to
the domestic European market.
EMC-compatible installation of the HMI device
The EMC-compliant installation of the HMI device and the application of interference-proof
cable is the basis for interference-free operation. The "Directives for interference-free
installation of PLCs" and the "PROFIBUS Networks" manual also apply for the installation of
the HMI device.
Pulse-shaped disturbance
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules with regard to pulseshaped interference. The precondition for electromagnetic compatibility is that the HMI
device meets the specifications and guidelines for electrical installation.
Pulse-shaped disturbance
Tested with
Degree of
severity
Electrostatic discharge
in accordance with IEC 61000-4-2
Air discharge: 8 kV
Contact discharge: 6 kV
3
Burst pulses
(high-speed transient interference)
in accordance with IEC 61000-4-4
2 kV power supply cable
2 kV signal cable, > 30 m
1 kV signal cable, < 30 m
3
High-power surge pulses in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5, external protective circuit required
(refer to the manual Automation System S7-300, Installation, "Lightning and overvoltage protection"
section)
Asymmetrical coupling
2 kV power cable
DC voltage with protective elements
3
2 kV signal/data cable, > 30 m,
with protective elements as required
Symmetrical coupling
1 kV power cable
DC voltage with protective elements
3
1 KV signal cable, > 30 m,
with protective elements as required
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
35
Safety instructions and approvals
2.4 Electromagnetic compatibility
Sinusoidal interference
The following table shows the EMC behavior of the modules with respect to sinusoidal
interference. This requires the HMI device to meet the specifications and directives for
electrical installation.
Sinusoidal interference
Test values
HF radiation (in electromagnetic
fields) in accordance with
IEC 61000-4-3
•
•
RF interference current on
cables and cable shielding
conforming to IEC 61000-4-6
Degree of
severity
80% amplitude modulation at 1 kHz
with 10 V/m in the range of 80 MHz to 1 GHz
with 3 V/m in the range 1.4 GHz to 2 GHz
with 1 V/m the range 2 GHz to 2.7 GHz
10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 900 MHz
10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 1.89 GHz
Test voltage 10 V, with 80% amplitude modulation
of 1 kHz in the 9 MHz to 80 MHz range
3
3
Emission of radio interference
The following table shows the unwanted emissions from electromagnetic fields in
accordance with EN 55011, Limit Value Class A, Group 1, measured at a distance of 10 m.
From 30 to 230 MHz
< 40 dB (μV/m) quasi-peak
From 230 to 1000 MHz
< 47 dB (μV/m) quasi-peak
Additional measures
If you want to connect an HMI device to the public power supply system, you must ensure
Limit Value Class B in accordance with EN 55022.
36
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Safety instructions and approvals
2.5 Transport and storage conditions
2.5
Transport and storage conditions
Mechanical and climatic conditions for transportation and storage
This HMI device meets the requirements for IEC 61131-2 relating to transportation and
storage conditions. The following specifications apply to the transportation and storage of an
HMI device in its original packaging.
The climatic conditions conform to the following standards:
● IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage
● IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transport
The mechanical conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2.
Type of condition
Permitted range
Drop test (in transport package)
≤1m
Temperature
From –20 to +60° C
Atmospheric pressure
From 1 140 hPa to 660 hPa,
corresponds to an elevation of –1 000 to 3 500 m
Relative humidity
From 10 to 90%, without condensation
Sinusoidal vibration in accordance with
IEC 60068-2-6
5 to 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
9 Hz to 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock in accordance with IEC 60068-2-29
250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1 000 shocks
NOTICE
Avoid condensation
If the HMI device is subjected to low temperatures or extreme fluctuations in temperature
during transportation, moisture could occur on or inside the HMI device. Condensation can
occur. This can cause malfunctions.
The HMI device must have acquired room temperature before it is put into operation. Do
not expose the HMI device to direct radiation from a heater in order to warm it up. If there is
condensation, wait approximately 4 hours until the HMI device has dried completely before
switching it on.
Proper transport and storage, installation and assembly as well as careful operation and
maintenance are required to ensure trouble-free and safe operation of the HMI device.
The warranty for the HMI device will be deemed void if these stipulations are not heeded.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
37
Safety instructions and approvals
2.5 Transport and storage conditions
38
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
3
Planning application
3.1
Notes about usage
Mechanical and climatic conditions of use
The HMI device is designed for use in a location protected from the effects of the weather.
The conditions of use meet the requirements for DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
● Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
● Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)
Use with additional measures
The HMI device should not be used at the following locations unless additional measures are
taken:
● In locations with a high degree of ionizing radiation
● In locations with severe operating conditions, for example, due to:
– Corrosive vapors, gases, oils or chemicals
– Electrical or magnetic fields of high intensity
● In plants that require special monitoring, for example:
– Elevators
– Systems in especially hazardous rooms
Mechanical environmental conditions
The mechanical environmental conditions for the HMI device are specified in the following
table in terms of sinusoidal vibration.
Frequency range
Constant
Occasional
10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz
Amplitude 0.0375 mm
Amplitude 0.075 mm
58 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz
Constant acceleration 0.5 g
Constant acceleration 1 g
Reducing vibrations
If the HMI device is subjected to greater shocks or vibrations, you must take appropriate
measures to reduce acceleration or amplitudes.
We recommend mounting the HMI device on damping materials (on rubber-metal vibration
dampers, for example).
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
39
Planning application
3.1 Notes about usage
Testing mechanical environmental conditions
The following table provides information on the type and scope of tests for mechanical
environmental conditions.
Test for
Test standard
Comments
Vibrations
Vibration test in accordance
with IEC 60068, part 2–6
(sinusoidal)
Type of vibration:
Transitional rate of the frequency:
1 octave/minute.
10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz,
constant amplitude of 0.075 mm
58 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz,
constant acceleration 1 g
Vibration duration:
10 frequency cycles per axis at each of the three
associated vertical axes
Shock
Shock test in accordance
with IEC 60068, Part 2 –29
Type of shock: Half-sine
Shock intensity:
Peak value 15 g, duration 11 ms
Direction of impact:
3 shocks in ± direction at each one of the three
associated vertical axes
Climatic environmental conditions
The following table shows the climatic conditions for operation of the HMI device.
40
Environmental conditions Permitted range
Comments
Temperature
• Vertical mounting
• Mounting at an angle
From 0 to 50° C
From 0 to 40° C
See the "Mounting positions and
type of fixation" section
Relative humidity
10 to 90%, without condensation
Atmospheric pressure
1 140 to 795 hPa
Corresponds to an elevation
of –1 000 to 2 000 m
Pollutant concentration
SO2: < 0,5 ppm;
Relative humidity < 60%,
no condensation
Test: 10 cm3/m3; 10 days
H2S: < 0.1 ppm;
Relative humidity < 60%,
no condensation
Test: 1 cm3/m3; 10 days
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Planning application
3.2 Mounting positions
3.2
Mounting positions
Mounting position
The HMI device is suitable for installation in:
● Mounting cabinets
● Control cabinets
● Switchboards
● Consoles
In the following, all of these mounting options are referred to by the general term "cabinet".
The HMI device is self-ventilated and approved for vertical and inclined mounting in
stationary cabinets.
–
+
Mounting position
Deviation from the vertical
①
Inclined
≤ 35°
②
Vertical
0°
CAUTION
Damage due to overheating
Convection through the HMI device is reduced with installation at an angle.This fact also
reduces the maximum permitted operating temperature for operation.
With sufficient forced ventilation, you can operate the HMI device at an inclined mounting
position up to the permitted ambient temperature for vertical installation.
Otherwise the HMI device may be damaged and the approvals and warranty may become
obsolete.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
41
Planning application
3.3 Preparing for Mounting
3.3
Preparing for Mounting
Select the mounting location of the HMI device
Points to observe when selecting the mounting location:
● Position the HMI device so that it is not subjected to direct sunlight.
● Position the HMI device such that it is ergonomically accessible for the user. Choose a
suitable mounting height.
● Ensure that the air vents of the HMI device are not covered as a result of the mounting.
● Observe the permissible mounting positions for the HMI device.
NOTICE
Stability of the mounting cut-out
The material in the area of the mounting cut-out must provide sufficient strength to
guarantee enduring and safe mounting of the HMI device.
The force of the clamps or operation of the device may not lead to deformation of the
material in order to achieve the degrees of protection described below.
The material thickness at the mounting cut-out must be at least 1.0 mm.
Degrees of protection
The protection ratings are only ensured if the mounting cutout conforms to the following:
● Permitted deviation from plane at the mounting cutout: ≤ 0,5 mm
This condition must be fulfilled for the mounted HMI device.
● Permissible surface roughness in the area of the seal: ≤ 120 µm (Rz 120)
● With IP65 degree of protection or for enclosure type 4X/type 12 (indoor use only), the
material thickness at the mounting cut-out can be a maximum of 6 mm.
Spring clamps or metal mounting clamps, each with or without clamping frames, are used
depending on the material thickness at the mounting cut-out.
The relationships are shown in the table below:
Material thickness
Spring clamp
Metal mounting clamp Clamping frame required
1,0 mm to 1,5 mm
x
x
Yes
1,5 to 2 mm
x
-
No
-
x
Yes
2 to 4 mm
x
-
No
4 to 6 mm
-
x
No
The clamping frame is available as an accessory, see section Accessories (Page 23).
42
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Planning application
3.3 Preparing for Mounting
Dimensions of the mounting cut-out
The following table shows the dimensions of the required mounting cut-out:
Mounting cut-out
MP 277 8" Touch
MP 277 8" Key
MP 277 10" Touch
MP 277 10" Key
Width
226+1 mm
338+1 mm
310+1 mm
434 +1 mm
Height
166+1
206 +1
248+1
291+1 mm
Depth
61 mm
mm
mm
61 mm
mm
61 mm
60 mm
Mounting compatibility
The mounting cut-outs of the Multi Panels are compatible with the mounting cut-outs of the
following SIMATIC HMI devices:
Multi Panel mounting cut-out
Compatible to the mounting cut-outs of the HMI device
MP 277 10" Touch
Thin Client 10" Touch
MP 270B 10" Touch
KTP1000 Basic
MP 277 INOX 10" Touch
TP 270 10"
MP 377 12" Touch
MP 270B 10" Key
OP 270 10"
MP 277 10" Key
Maintaining clearances
The HMI device must be installed with the following clearances:
● Always allow 50 mm above and below the mounting cutout respectively for ventilation
● Right and left of the mounting cut-out respectively for attaching the mounting clamps:
– When using a clamping frame: 25 mm each
– Without clamping frame, with spring clamps: 25 mm each
– Without clamping frame, with metal mounting clamps: 15 mm each
● At least 10 mm behind the rear panel of the HMI device
NOTICE
Ensure that the maximum ambient temperature is not exceeded when mounting the
device in a cabinet and especially in a closed enclosure.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
43
Planning application
3.4 Specifications for Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection
3.4
Specifications for Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of
Protection
Test voltages
Insulation stability is demonstrated in the type test with the following test voltages in
accordance with IEC 61131-2:
Circuits with a nominal voltage of Ue to other
circuits or ground
Test voltage
< 50 V
500 V DC
Protection class
Protection Class I in accordance with IEC 60536, i.e. protective conductor connection to
profile rail required.
Protection against foreign objects and water
Degree of protection in accordance with
IEC 60529
Explanation
Front
When mounted:
• IP65
• Enclosure Type 4X/Type 12 (indoor use only)
Rear panel
IP20
Touch protection test with standard test probes.
There is no protection against ingress by water.
The degree of protection provided by the front side can only be guaranteed when the
mounting seal lies completely against the mounting cut-out.
3.5
Rated voltages
The following table shows the rated voltage and the corresponding tolerance range.
44
Nominal voltage
Tolerance range
+24 VDC
20.4 V to 28.8 V (–15 %, +20 %)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Mounting and connecting
4.1
4
Checking the package contents
Check the package contents for visible signs of transport damage and for completeness.
NOTICE
Damaged parts
A damaged part will cause the HMI device to malfunction.
Do not install parts damaged during shipment. In the case of damaged parts, contact your
Siemens representative.
The following is supplied along with the HMI device:
● HMI device
● Accessory kit with mounting clamps and mains terminal
Additional documents may be included in the product package of all HMI devices.
The documentation belongs to the HMI device and is required for subsequent
commissioning. Retain all enclosed documentation for the entire service life of the HMI
device. You must pass on the enclosed documentation to any subsequent owner or user of
the HMI device. Make sure that every supplement to the documentation that you receive is
stored together with the operating instructions.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
45
Mounting and connecting
4.2 Mounting the HMI Device
4.2
Mounting the HMI Device
Requirement
All packaging components and protective foils should be removed from the HMI device.
To install the HMI device, you need the mounting clamps from the accessories. The
mounting seal must be fitted on the HMI device. If the mounting seal is damaged, order a
replacement seal. The mounting seal is part of the associated service pack.
Mounting
NOTICE
Always mount the HMI device according to the instructions in this manual.
Proceed as follows:
1. Check that the mounting seal is fitted on the HMI device.
Do not install the mounting seal turned inside out. This may cause leaks in the mounting
cut-out.
2. Insert the HMI device into the mounting cutout from the front.
3. Insert a mounting clamp into a recess on the HMI device.
4. Fasten the mounting clamp as described in the corresponding product information. The
product information on metal mounting clamps or spring clamps is available in the
Internet at the following link:
– Product Information "Metal mounting clamp":
"http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/34915725"
– Product Information "Spring clamp":
"http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/34916893"
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all mounting clamps that are required for the installation of the
HMI device.
NOTICE
Check the fit of the mounting seal on the front. The mounting seal must not protrude
from the HMI device.
Otherwise, repeat steps 1 to 5.
46
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Mounting and connecting
4.2 Mounting the HMI Device
Positions of mounting clamps on the MP 277 8" Touch
You will need 10 mounting clamps in total. The following figure shows the positions of the
mounting clamps.
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
Positions of mounting clamps on the MP 277 10" Touch
You will need 12 mounting clamps in total. The following figure shows the positions of the
mounting clamps.
ದ
ದ
ದ
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
ದ
47
Mounting and connecting
4.2 Mounting the HMI Device
Positions of the mounting clamps on the MP 277 8" Key
You will need 14 mounting clamps in total. The following figure shows the positions of the
mounting clamps.
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
Positions of the mounting clamps on the MP 277 10" Key
You will need 10 mounting clamps in total. The following figure shows the positions of the
mounting clamps.
48
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
4.3
Connecting the HMI device
4.3.1
Overview
Requirement
● The HMI device must be mounted according to the specifications of these operating
instructions.
● Always use shielded standard cables.
Additional information is available in the catalog and online order system at
"http://mall.automation.siemens.com".
Connection sequence
NOTICE
Damage to the HMI device
If you do not keep to the connection sequence you could damage the HMI device.
Ensure you connect the HMI device in the sequence described above.
1. Equipotential bonding
2. Power supply
Perform a power-up test to ensure the power supply is connected with the correct
polarity.
3. Controller
4. Configuration PC as necessary
5. I/Os as necessary
Disconnect the HMI device by completing the above steps in reverse order.
Connecting the cables
When connecting the cables, ensure that the contact pins are not bent. Secure the cable
connectors by screwing the connector onto the socket.
See also
Safety Instructions (Page 31)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
49
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
4.3.2
Ports
The following figure shows the interfaces of the MP 277 HMI device.
①
Power supply connector
②
RS-422/RS-485 interface X10 / IF1b
③
Ethernet interface
④
USB ports X20 and X21
See also
Power supply (Page 260)
X10/IF 1B (RS 422/RS 485) (Page 260)
X20, X21 (USB) (Page 261)
X1 (Ethernet/LAN) (Page 261)
50
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
4.3.3
Connecting the equipotential bonding circuit
Differences in electrical potential
Differences in potential may occur between spatially separated system parts. Such
differences in electrical potential can lead to high equalizing currents over the data cables
and therefore to the destruction of their interfaces. Equalizing currents can develop if the
cable shielding is terminated at both ends and grounded to different parts of the system.
Differences in potential can develop when a system is connected to different mains.
General requirements of equipotential bonding
Differences in electrical potential must be reduced using equipotential bonding to ensure
trouble-free operation of the relevant components of the electronic system. The following
must therefore be observed when installing the equipotential bonding circuit:
● The effectiveness of equipotential bonding increases as the impedance of the
equipotential bonding conductor decreases or as its cross-section increases.
● If two plant parts are interconnected by means of shielded data cables and their shielding
is bonded at both ends to the grounding/protective conductor, the impedance of the
additionally installed equipotential bonding cable must not exceed 10% of the shielding
impedance.
● The cross-section of a selected equipotential bonding conductor must be capable of
handling the maximum equalizing current. Experience has shown that equipotential
bonding conductors with a minimum cross-section of 16 mm² should be fitted between
the control cabinets or the ground point of the supporting arm or the stand for PRO HMI
devices.
● Use equipotential bonding conductors made of copper or galvanized steel. Establish a
large surface contact between the equipotential bonding conductors and the
grounding/protective conductor and protect them from corrosion.
● Use a suitable cable clip to clamp the shield of the data cable flush to the equipotential
bonding rail. Keep the length of cable between the HMI device and the equipotential
bonding rail as short as possible.
● Route the equipotential bonding conductor and data cables in parallel and with minimum
clearance between them.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
51
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
Configuration graphic
①
Chassis terminal on the HMI device, example
②
Equipotential bonding conductor cross-section: 4 mm2
③
Control cabinet
④
Equipotential bonding conductor cross-section: min. 16 mm2
⑤
Ground connection
⑥
Cable clip
⑦
Equipotential bonding rail
⑧
Parallel routing of the equipotential bonding conductor and data cable
CAUTION
Damage to the interface modules possible
Cable shielding is not suitable for equipotential bonding.
Use only the prescribed equipotential bonding conductors. The equipotential bonding
conductor ④ must have a minimum cross-section of 16 mm². The interface modules may
otherwise be damaged or destroyed.
52
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
4.3.4
Connecting the Power Supply
Configuration graphic
The following figure shows the connection of the HMI device and the power supply.
03ಯ7RXFK
03ಯ.H\
03ಯ7RXFK
03ಯ.H\
Note when connecting
The mains terminal for connecting the power supply is contained in the accessory kit. The
mains terminal is designed for cables with a maximum cross-section of 1.5 mm².
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
53
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
Connecting the mains terminal
NOTICE
Damage
Do not tighten the screws of the power supply terminal if it is plugged into the HMI device.
The pressure from the screwdriver may otherwise damage the HMI device socket.
Only connect the wires when the mains terminal is withdrawn.
*1'
9'&
Connect the power supply terminal to the cables of the power supply as shown in the figure
above. Ensure that the lines are connected properly to the correct terminals. Refer to the
label for the contact pins on the rear of the HMI device.
Reverse polarity protection
The HMI device is equipped with reverse polarity protection.
Connecting the power supply
CAUTION
Safe electrical isolation
Use only 24 VDC power supply units with safe electrical isolation in accordance with
IEC 60364-4-41 or HD 384.04.41 (VDE 0100, Part 410), for example, in accordance with
the PELV standard.
The supply voltage must be within the specified voltage range. Malfunctions in the HMI
device may otherwise result.
Applies to non-isolated system design:
Connect the connection for GND 24 V from the 24 V power supply output to equipotential
bonding for uniform reference potential. You should always select a central point of
termination.
See also
Ports (Page 50)
54
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
4.3.5
Connecting the PLC
Configuration graphic
The following figure shows the connection of the HMI device and the controller.
03ಯ7RXFK
03ಯ.H\
03ಯ7RXFK
03ಯ.H\
6,0$7,&6
352),1(7
56
56
56
56
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
6,0$7,&6
6,0$7,&6
6,0$7,&
6,0$7,&
5656
3/&
E\RWKHU
PDQXIDFWXUHUV
56
56
3/&
E\RWKHU
PDQXIDFWXUHUV
56
56
3/&
E\RWKHU
PDQXIDFWXUHUV
55
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
NOTICE
Use only the approved cables to connect a SIMATIC S7 controller.
Standard cables are available for the connection. You can find additional information on this
in the Internet at "http://mall.automation.siemens.com".
Connecting PROFINET
NOTICE
Use a cross-cable for the PROFINET connection when using a point-to-point connection.
NOTICE
PROFINET IO
If you use PROFINET IO direct keys, the HMI device must be connected with a switch. For
detailed instructions regarding the installation of PROFINET networks, please refer to the
PROFINET system description manual.
Only connect the HMI device to public Ethernet networks using a switch or comparable
device.
56
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
Configuring an RS-422/RS-485 interface
A DIP switch for the configuration of the RS-422/RS-485 interface is located on the back of
the HMI device.
In the factory state, the DIP switch is set for communication with the SIMATIC S7 PLC via
RS 485.
Note
Note the diagrams of DIP switch settings on the rear panel of the HMI device.
The following table shows the DIP switch settings. The send and receive direction is toggled
internally by the RTS signal.
Communication
Switch setting
RS 485
Meaning
21
No RTS on plug, for data transfer between PLC and
HMI device
(factory state)
RTS on pin 4, same as PLC,
for example for commissioning
21
RTS on pin 9, same as programming device,
for commissioning, for example
21
RS 422
RS-422 interface is active.
21
See also
Ports (Page 50)
Accessories (Page 23)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
57
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
4.3.6
Connecting a Configuring PC
Configuration graphic
The following figure shows the connection of the HMI device and the configuration PC.
03ಯ7RXFK
03ಯ.H\
03ಯ7RXFK
03ಯ.H\
86%
352),1(7
56
56
56
56
56
3&
3&
3&
3&
Use a cross-cable for the PROFINET connection when using a point-to-point connection.
The interfaces are described in the specifications.
For RS-485-RS-232 conversion, you can order the PC/PPI cable from Siemens AG.
58
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
Configuring the PC/PPI cable
Use the DIP switches to configure the transfer rate of the PC/PPI cable.
Note
Set a lower bit rate if the connection is lost during the operating system update. If you use a
high bit rates, you need to use PC/PPI cable version 3 or higher. The version code is printed
on the cable ("E stand 3," for example, corresponds to version 3).
①
DIP switch
②
LEDs
Set the DIP switches 1 to 3 to the same value as in WinCC flexible. DIP switches 4 to 8 must
be set to "0".
①
DIP switch
The following bit rates can be set:
DIP switch 1
DIP switch 2
DIP switch 3
115.2
Bit rate in kbps
1
1
0
57.6
1
1
1
38.4
0
0
0
19.2
0
0
1
9.6
0
1
0
4.8
0
1
1
2.4
1
0
0
1.2
1
0
1
In the figure, the bit rate is set to 115.2 kbps.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
59
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
Note when connecting
NOTICE
USB connection sequence
Observe the following sequence when connecting by USB:
1. HMI device
2. PC
USB host-to-host cable
Use only the driver for the USB host-to-host cable that is included in the WinCC flexible
package. Never use the driver supplied with the USB host-to-host cable.
Update operating system.
If there is no serviceable HMI device image on the HMI device, you can only update the
operating system by restoring the factory setting. Use the RS-422/485 interface with the
PC/PPI cable on the HMI device.
Replacing the HMI device
If you connect more than one HMI device with the same IP address in succession to a
single configuration PC, you need to ping the configuration PC once from the HMI device
on each time you replace the HMI device.
See also
Accessories (Page 23)
Ports (Page 50)
60
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
4.3.7
Connecting a USB device
Note
Use only devices approved for connection to the HMI device.
The list of devices approved for connection to HMI devices via the USB port is available in
the Internet at "http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19188460" and
"http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/11376409".
Below are examples of devices you can connect to the USB port of the HMI device:
● Mouse
● Keyboard
● Printer
● Industrial USB Hub 4
● USB memory devices
● Barcode reader
NOTICE
Malfunction from external device possible
If you connect external devices with their own power supply to the USB port and without
using an non-insulated installation, you may experience functional problems.
If you wish to connect external devices with their own power supply to the USB port,
ensure that the installation is non-isolated.
NOTICE
Rated load of the interface
Malfunctions may occur on a USB device that presents an electrical overload on the
port.
Adhere to the values for the maximum load on the USB port.
See also
Connecting the Power Supply (Page 53)
X20, X21 (USB) (Page 261)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
61
Mounting and connecting
4.3 Connecting the HMI device
4.3.8
Connecting a Printer.
Configuration graphic
The following figure shows the connection of the HMI device and the printer.
03ಯ7RXFK
03ಯ.H\
03ಯ7RXFK
03ಯ.H\
86%
352),1(7
3&
Note when connecting
NOTICE
Use only cables with metal-braided shielding grounded at both ends to connect the HMI
device and printer.
Use a cross-cable for the Ethernet connection when using a point-to-point connection.
Some printers may require the ASCII character set used in the project to also be defined on
the printer.
You can find the list of current printers and required settings for HMI devices in the Internet
at "http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/11376409".
Read the documentation supplied with the printer when connecting it.
62
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Mounting and connecting
4.4 Switching on and Testing the HMI device
See also
Ports (Page 50)
Connecting a USB device (Page 61)
4.4
Switching on and Testing the HMI device
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Switching on the power supply.
The screen lights up after power is switched on. A progress bar is displayed during
startup.
If the HMI device fails to start, you have probably crossed the wires on the mains
terminal. Check the connected wires and change their connection. The Loader opens
once the operating system has started.
The HMI device automatically switches to "transfer" mode during initial startup under the
following conditions:
– No project is loaded on the HMI device.
– At least one data channel has been configured.
During this process the following dialog appears:
2. Press "Cancel" to stop the transfer.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
63
Mounting and connecting
4.5 Securing the cables
Result
The Loader appears again.
Note
When restarting the system, a project may already be loaded on the HMI device. The system
then skips "Transfer" mode and starts the project.
Use the relevant operator control to close the project.
Refer to your plant documentation to find any available additional information on this topic.
Function test
Perform a function test following commissioning. The HMI device is fully functional when one
of the following states is indicated:
● The "Transfer" dialog is displayed.
● The loader is displayed.
● A project is started.
Shutting down the HMI device
Terminate the project at the HMI device before switching it off.
You have the following options for switching off the HMI device:
● Switch off the power supply.
● Remove the mains terminal from the HMI device.
4.5
Securing the cables
After the power-on test, to ensure strain relief, use cable ties to secure the connected cables
to the marked fixing elements.
)DVWHQLQJHOHPHQW
64
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
5
Operator controls and displays
5.1
Front operator controls
MP 277 Touch
①
Display with touch screen
The assignment of the operator controls for the MP 277 8" Touch and the MP 277 10" Touch
is basically the same.
You can operate the MP 277 Touch using the touch screen. All operator controls required for
operator input are displayed on the touch screen once the HMI device has started.
MP 277 Key
①
Function keys with LED
②
Display
③
Function keys without LED
④
System keys - alphanumeric keys
⑤
System keys - control keys
⑥
System keys - cursor keys
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
65
Operator controls and displays
5.1 Front operator controls
The assignment of the operator controls for the MP 277 8" Key and the MP 277 10" Key is
basically the same.
The MP 277 Key is operated using the system keys and the function keys.
The function assigned to a specific function key is defined during configuration. The function
keys have no function prior to the project being opened.
NOTICE
Unintentional action possible
Do not carry out several operations simultaneously. You may otherwise trigger
unintentional actions.
• Using the touch screen: Always touch only one operator control on the screen.
• Using the keys: Do not press more than two keys simultaneously.
NOTICE
Damage to the touch screen possible
Never touch the touch screen with pointed or sharp objects. Avoid applying excessive
pressure to the touch screen with hard objects. Both these will substantially reduce the
useful life of the touch screen and even lead to total failure.
Always operate the HMI touch screen with your fingers or with a touch pen.
Damage to the keyboard
Use only your fingers to operate the keys of your HMI device.
Using hard instruments to press the keys considerably reduces the service life of the key
mechanism.
See also
Design of the HMI Device MP 277 8" Touch (Page 14)
Design of the HMI Device MP 277 8" Key (Page 16)
Design of the HMI Device MP 277 10" Touch (Page 18)
Design of the HMI Device MP 277 10" Key (Page 20)
66
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operator controls and displays
5.2 Using Memory Cards with the HMI Device
5.2
Using Memory Cards with the HMI Device
Introduction
The following can be saved to the memory card of the HMI device:
● HMI device image (backup)
● Logs
● Recipes
● Operating system
● Applications
● Additional specifications
The memory card can be inserted and removed during operation. Do not remove the
memory card while data is being accessed by an application, for example during backup or
recipe transfer.
NOTICE
Multimedia card
The multimedia card of the SIMATIC S7 controller is not compatible with the HMI device.
Procedure – inserting a memory card
Proceed as follows:
Insert the memory card into the memory card slot.
①
Memory card
②
Memory card slot
When inserting the memory card, please note that it can only be inserted as shown in the
diagram. When the memory card is correctly inserted into the slot, it stands approx. 3 mm
proud of the slot.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
67
Operator controls and displays
5.2 Using Memory Cards with the HMI Device
Using a memory card for the first time
NOTICE
Data loss
The first time you use a memory card the HMI device will request that you format the card.
Save a backup copy of memory card data to a PC beforehand.
Proceed as follows in order to prevent data loss:
1. Cancel the formatting procedure by pressing "ESC".
2. Save a backup copy of vital data to a PC.
3. Format the memory card on the HMI device.
4. Transfer the backup data from the PC to the memory card.
You can now transfer the backup data from the memory card to the HMI device.
Procedure – removing a memory card
NOTICE
Data loss
The data on the memory card may be lost if you attempt to remove it while the HMI device
is accessing its data.
Do not remove the memory card while data is being accessed. Observe the corresponding
alarms on the screen.
Proceed as follows:
1. Unplug the memory card from the memory card slot.
2. Store the memory card in a safe place.
68
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operator controls and displays
5.3 Labeling the Function Keys at the MP 277 Key
5.3
Labeling the Function Keys at the MP 277 Key
Introduction
You can label the function keys as required for your project. Use the labeling strips for this
purpose.
Note
Do not write on the keyboard to label the function keys.
Any printable and writable foil can be used as labeling strip. The permitted thickness of the
labeling strip is 0.13 mm. Paper labeling strips are inappropriate.
You can use transparent foil, the keyboard membrane of the HMI device is printed on the
reverse side. Use transparent foil so that the LEDs of the function keys can be seen.
Printing labeling strips
WinCC flexible comes with a range of labeling strip templates. You will find further
information regarding the location of the templates in the WinCC flexible Online Help.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
69
Operator controls and displays
5.3 Labeling the Function Keys at the MP 277 Key
Dimensions of the labeling strip for the MP 277 8" Key
[r
ದ
[r
Dimensions of the labeling strip for the MP 277 10" Key
5
5
70
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operator controls and displays
5.3 Labeling the Function Keys at the MP 277 Key
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Edit the template and then it on the foil.
Another option is to print blank templates and later label them manually.
2. Apply a fixing spray to the labeling strips.
The fixing spray ensures that the text is water resistant and does not smear, and that the
printer ink on the keyboard membrane does not run.
3. Cut out the labeling strip.
Ensure that the corners are cut according to the diagram shown above as this makes it
easier to slide them into the slot.
4. Remove any existing labeling strips.
Note
Wait for the printed labeling strips to dry before you insert them.
5. Slide the labeling strips ② into the slot ①.
6. Slide the labeling strips into the slot up to the stop.
The labeling strip will protrude approximately 3 cm out of the slot. The template
dimensions for the labeling strips are designed so that the labeling is correctly placed for
the function keys. It is not necessary to secure the labeling strip.
When mounting the HMI device, ensure that the labeling strips do not become jammed
between the mounting cut-out and the HMI device.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
71
Operator controls and displays
5.3 Labeling the Function Keys at the MP 277 Key
72
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.1
6
Loader
Loader
The following figure shows the loader.
The loader buttons have the following functions:
● Press the "Transfer" button to set the HMI device to "Transfer" mode.
The transfer mode can only be activated when at least one data channel has been
enabled for the transfer.
● Press the "Start" button to start the project on the HMI device.
If you do not perform an operation, the project on the HMI device will automatically start
after a delay.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
73
Configuring the operating system
6.1 Loader
● Press the "Control Panel" button to open the Control Panel of the HMI device.
You can change various settings in the Control Panel, for example, the transfer settings.
● Press the "Taskbar" button to activate the taskbar with opened Windows CE Start menu:
Open loader
The following options are available to open the loader:
● The loader appears briefly after starting the HMI device.
● The loader appears when the project is closed.
If configured, use the relevant operator control to close the project.
Refer to your plant documentation to find any available additional information on this
topic.
Key operation in the loader
The following table shows the key combinations for navigating in the loader.
Key combination
,
ENTER
74
,
TAB
Function
The next or previous entry is selected.
The selected button is operated.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.1 Loader
Protection against unauthorized use
You can protect the control panel against unauthorized access by using a password.
You can also protect the taskbar and the Desktop with the help of SecureMode. If the HMI
device is protected, "secure mode" is displayed on the Windows CE desktop. You can find
additional information on this in the section "Setting up and disabling SecureMode
(Page 77)".
The "Transfer" and "Start" buttons can always be used without having to enter a password.
Password protection prevents maloperation. This increases the security of the system or
equipment because settings for the current project can only be changed after entering the
password.
NOTICE
Loss of data possible
If the password is no longer available, you can only cancel password protection by updating
the operating system. All data on the HMI device will be deleted when you update the
operating system.
Back up the HMI device's data.
Pocket Internet Explorer
The Pocket Internet Explorer is installed on the HMI device.
Note
The Pocket Internet Explorer and the PC version of the Internet Explorer differ in terms of
functional range.
Internet Explorer for Windows CE has separate proxy settings that are independent of the
settings in the control panel of the HMI device.
You can find additional information at the Microsoft's website.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
75
Configuring the operating system
6.1 Loader
Key operation in the user interface
The following table shows the key combinations for navigating in the user interface.
Key combination
Function
CTRL
+
ESC
The task bar is activated with the open Windows CE start menu.
ALT
+
ESC
The next active program is displayed.
ALT
+
TAB
The Task Manager is opened.
Key operation in the Explorer
The following table shows the key combinations for navigating in the Explorer.
Key combination
Function
•
•
TAB
Toggles the active window.
Toggles between the Windows CE Desktop and the window.
Selects the first entry.
FN
+
HOME
FN
+
END
CTRL
+
Selects the last entry.
A
B
Selects everything, if the left LED of the key
A-Z
lights up
Activates the menu bar.
ALT
Changes to the higher level.
ALT
+
CTRL
Opens the shortcut menu.
ALT
+
ENTER
Displays the properties.
See also
Switching on and Testing the HMI device (Page 63)
Configuring the data channel (Page 115)
Changing Password Protection (Page 94)
76
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Setting up and disabling SecureMode
6.2
Setting up and disabling SecureMode
Overview
You can protect the control panel against unauthorized access with a password. You can
also protect the taskbar and the Desktop with the help of the SecureMode.
Function of SecureMode
You set up SecureMode by setting up a password in the control panel. SecureMode is then
automatically activated. The label "secure mode" is displayed in the Windows CE Desktop.
If you now want to use a function on the taskbar or Desktop, you have to enter the password.
When you have entered the password, the label "secure mode" is no longer displayed. All
the functions of the taskbar and Desktop can now be used freely. To reactivate SecureMode,
double-click the
icon on the Desktop. The "secure mode" label is displayed again. The
HMI device is protected again.
Canceling SecureMode
To completely cancel SecureMode, delete the password.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
77
Configuring the operating system
6.3 Control Panel
6.3
Control Panel
6.3.1
Overview
Control Panel of the HMI device
You can configure the following settings in the Control Panel of the HMI device:
● Date/time
● Screen saver
● Regional settings
● Transfer settings
● Network settings
● Delay time
● Password
78
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.3 Control Panel
Opening the Control Panel
The Control Panel can be opened as follows:
● In the startup phase
Press "Control Panel" to open the HMI device Control Panel in the Loader.
● In a running project
Operate the operating element provided for the respective task, if configured.
Alternatively you can open the Control Panel from the Windows CE start menu.
1. Open the Windows CE start menu.
– For HMI devices with key operation use the key combination
– For HMI devices with touch operation, select the key
ESC
+
CTRL
on the alphanumeric screen
keyboard twice.
2. Open the Control Panel with "Settings > Control Panel".
6.3.2
Reference for functions
The following table shows the settings in the Control Panel.
Symbol
Function
Saving to external storage device (backup) (Page 131)
Restoring from external storage device (Page 133)
Importing and Deleting Certificates (Page 129)
Setting the Date and Time (Page 95)
Configuring the Screen Keyboard (Page 88)
Changing General Internet Settings (Page 126)
Setting the Proxy Server (Page 127)
Changing Privacy Settings (Page 128)
Setting the Character Repetition of the Keyboard (Page 89)
Setting the Double-click (Page 91)
Changing the Network Configuration (Page 122)
• IP address
• Name server
Changing the Logon Data (Page 124)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
79
Configuring the operating system
6.3 Control Panel
Symbol
Function
Backing up Registry Information (Page 98)
Changing monitor settings (Page 99)
Displaying Information about the HMI Device (Page 106)
Restarting the HMI Device (Page 105)
Calibrating the Touch Screen (Page 92) 1)
Activate Memory Management (Page 136)
Changing Password Protection (Page 94)
Changing the Printer Properties (Page 102)
Enabling PROFINET IO (Page 117)
Changing Regional Settings (Page 97)
• Number format
• Currency
• Time format
• Date format
Changing S7 transfer settings (Page 112)
Setting the screen saver (Page 100)
•
•
Screen saver
Reducing screen backlighting
Displaying System Properties (Page 107)
Setting the device name of the HMI device (Page 121)
Configuring the data channel (Page 115)
Setting the Delay Time (Page 108)
Setting the uninterruptible power supply (Page 109)
State of uninterruptible power supply (Page 111)
Set the volume (Page 103)
Changing E-Mail Settings (Page 125) 2)
80
1)
Only with MP 277 Touch
2)
The "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" tab can contain additional tabs. This depends
on the options that have been enabled for network operation in the project.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.3 Control Panel
6.3.3
Operating the Control Panel
6.3.3.1
Overview
Operator input options
The hardware of the HMI device determines which of the following operator control options
are available:
● Touch screen
The operating elements shown in the dialogs are touch-sensitive. Touch objects are
basically operated in the same way as mechanical keys. You activate operating elements
by touching them with your finger. To double-click them, touch an operating element
twice in succession.
● HMI device keyboard
The operating elements shown in the dialogs are selected and operated using the keys of
the HMI device.
● External USB keyboard
● External USB mouse
Entries using an external keyboard
An external keyboard can be used to operate the Control Panel in exactly the same way as
the HMI device keyboard. Use the keys of the external keyboard which correspond to the
HMI device keys in the description.
Operator entries using an external mouse
An external mouse can be used to operate the Control Panel in exactly the same way as the
HMI device touch screen. Click the described operating elements with the mouse.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
81
Configuring the operating system
6.3 Control Panel
6.3.3.2
Input with the Touch Screen
Introduction
The Control Panel is operated with the HMI device touch screen.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to change settings in the Control Panel:
1. Close the project.
Use the provided operating element.
The Loader appears.
2. Open the Control Panel by pressing the "Control Panel" button.
3. To open the required dialog, double-click its symbol.
4. Change as required by touching the tab.
5. Now make the necessary changes.
Touch the respective input object to make entries.
– Use the screen keyboard of the HMI device to enter the new values in the text boxes.
– Touch a button to operate it.
– Touch the selection box to open a drop down list box. Touch the required entry from
the drop down list box.
– Touch the check box to activate or deactivate a check box.
– Touch a radio button to select it.
6. Confirm the selection with the
button or abort the entry with the
button.
The dialog closes.
7. Close the Control Panel with the
button.
8. Start the project by pressing the "Start" button in the Loader.
Input with the screen keyboard
A screen keyboard is available for data input. The screen keyboard is displayed as soon as
you touch a text box. You can also call up the screen keyboard directly from the Control
Panel.
82
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.3 Control Panel
Display methods for the screen keyboard
You can change the display method for the screen keyboard and the position on the screen
can be fixed. Confirm the entry with the
button or abort the entry with the
key. Either
action closes the screen keyboard.
● Numerical screen keyboard
● Alphanumerical screen keyboard
The alphanumerical screen keyboard has various levels.
– Normal level
– Shift level
● Reduced screen keyboard
Changing the display of the screen keyboard
Key
Function
Switching between the numerical and alphanumerical keyboard
Switching between the normal level and Shift level of the alphanumerical screen
keyboard
Activation and deactivation of the numerical and alphanumerical keys of the
alphanumerical screen keyboard
Switching from full display to reduced display
Switching from reduced display to full display
Closing of reduced display of the screen keyboard
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
83
Configuring the operating system
6.3 Control Panel
Moving the screen keyboard
In order to move the screen keyboard, proceed as follows:
symbol.
Touch the
1. Touch and move the screen keyboard on the touch screen.
Release the
symbol when the required position is reached.
See also
Configuring the Screen Keyboard (Page 88)
Entering and Editing Numerical Values (Page 167)
Entering and editing alphanumerical values (Page 170)
Front operator controls (Page 65)
6.3.3.3
Input with the Keyboard
Introduction
The Control Panel is operated with the system keys of the HMI device.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to change settings in the Control Panel:
1. Close the project.
Use the provided operator control.
2. Open the Control Panel.
The loader is displayed.
– Select the "Control Panel" button in the loader using the cursor keys.
– Press
ENTER
.
The Control Panel is opened.
3. Select the symbol of the required dialog with the cursor keys.
4. Press
ENTER
to open the dialog.
5. Change the tab as required.
Press
TAB
until the name of the tab is selected. Now switch to the other tabs using the
cursor keys.
84
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.3 Control Panel
6. Press
TAB
to return to the input area and make the necessary changes.
Select the respective input object by pressing the
TAB
key to make entries.
– Use the system keys of the HMI device to enter the new values in the text boxes.
– To operate a button, select the button with the cursor keys and then press
– Open the selection lists with the key combination
ALT
+
ENTER
.
.
Select the required entry from the selection list using the cursor keys.
Confirm the selected entry by pressing
{
ENTER
.
}
– Press
to activate or deactivate a check box.
– Select a option button of a group using the cursor keys.
7. Confirm your entries with
ENTER
or discard your entries with
ESC
.
If you have selected an input object, you first have to complete entry.
The dialog box closes.
8. Close the Control Panel.
Press
ALT
. This opens the Control Panel menu.
– Select the "Close" entry using the cursor keys.
– Press
ENTER
.
The loader is displayed.
9. Start the project.
– Select the "Start" button in the loader using the cursor keys.
– Press
ENTER
.
The project is started.
Control keys
The tables below show the control keys used to operate the Control Panel.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
85
Configuring the operating system
6.3 Control Panel
Select operator controls
Key
TAB
SHIFT
+
Function
Description
Tabulator
Selects the next/previous operator control in the
tab sequence.
Cursor keys
Selects the next operator control to the left, right,
above or below the current screen object.
TAB
Navigates in the operator control.
Using operator controls
Key
Function
Description
Scroll back
Scrolls back a page in a list.
Scroll to the beginning
Scrolls to the beginning of a list.
Scroll forward
Scrolls one page forward in a list.
Scroll to the end
Scrolls to the end of a list.
Enter key
•
•
Operates a button.
Accepts and ends an entry.
Cancel
•
Deletes the characters of a value entry and
restores the original value.
Closes the active dialog.
HOME
FN
+
HOME
END
FN
+
END
ENTER
ESC
•
INS
DEL
86
ALT
+
CTRL
+
ENTER
Delete characters
Deletes the character to the right of the current
cursor position.
Delete characters
Deletes the character to the left of the current
cursor position.
Open selection list
Opens a selection list.
Accept value
Accepts the selected value in the selection list
without closing the list.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.3 Control Panel
Enter key combinations
Key
A-Z
Function
Purpose
Toggle key assignment
Toggles the assignment for a key with multiple
assignment.
• No LED is lit:
•
The number assignment is enabled. Pressing
the button once toggles to letter assignment.
An LED is lit:
The left or right letter assignment is enabled.
Each time the key is pressed, the system toggles
between the left letter assignment, the right letter
assignment and the number assignment.
SHIFT
FN
Toggle between upper-case
and lower-case
Used in key combinations, for example for entering
upper-case letters.
Switch to additional key
assignment
Some of the keys contain a key assignment
imprinted blue, for example the "%" character.
Used in key combinations for the blue key
assignment.
CTRL
General control function
Used in key combinations
ALT
General control function
Used in key combinations
See also
Entering and editing numerical values (Page 178)
Entering and editing alphanumerical values (Page 179)
Front operator controls (Page 65)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
87
Configuring the operating system
6.4 Changing settings for operation
6.4
Changing settings for operation
6.4.1
Configuring the Screen Keyboard
Introduction
You can change the layout and the position of the screen keyboard as follows.
Requirement
You have opened the "Siemens HMI InputPanel - Options" dialog by pressing the
"InputPanel"
icon.
①
Button for displaying the screen keyboard
②
Button for saving the screen keyboard settings
③
Button for closing the screen keyboard
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Display the screen keyboard by pressing the "Open Input Panel" button.
2. By pressing the
button, you can switch between the numerical and alphanumerical
screen keyboard.
3. Set the position of the screen keyboard by moving the screen keyboard on the screen.
4. Save your settings by pressing the "Save" button.
5. Close the screen keyboard by pressing the "Close Input Panel" button.
6. Close the dialog.
Result
The screen keyboard settings have been modified.
See also
Input with the Touch Screen (Page 82)
88
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.4 Changing settings for operation
6.4.2
Setting the Character Repetition of the Keyboard
Introduction
You can set the character repeat for the keyboard or screen keyboard in the Control Panel.
Requirement
You have opened the "Keyboard Properties" dialog box by pressing the "Keyboard"
icon.
①
Check box for activating the character repeat
②
Slider control and buttons for the delay time before character repeat
③
Slider control and buttons for the rate of the character repeat
④
Test field
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
89
Configuring the operating system
6.4 Changing settings for operation
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Enable character repeat" check box to enable the character repeat.
2. Use the buttons to set the delay and rate of the character repeat. You can also use the
slider control for this.
3. Verify your settings.
For HMI devices with touch operation.
– Touch the test field. The screen keyboard opens.
– Move the screen keyboard as needed.
– Touch any character and keep it pressed.
– Check the implementation of the character repetition and the rate of the character
repetition in the test field.
– Correct your setting if necessary.
For HMI devices with key operation.
– Select the test field.
– Press an alphanumeric key and keep the key pressed down.
– Check the implementation of the character repetition and the rate of the character
repetition in the test field.
– Correct your setting if necessary.
4. Confirm your entries.
The dialog box closes.
Result
The character repeat for the keyboard is now set.
90
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.4 Changing settings for operation
6.4.3
Setting the Double-click
Introduction
You can start applications in the Control Panel and in Windows CE with a double-click. A
double-click corresponds to two brief touches in sequence.
In the "Mouse Properties" dialog, make the following adjustments for touch screen operation
and operation with external mouse:
● Interval between touch contacts on the touch screen
● Interval between mouse clicks
Requirement
You have opened the "Mouse Properties" dialog with the "Mouse"
icon.
①
Pattern
②
Symbol
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Double-click the pattern twice.
After one double-click, the pattern is shown in inverse colors.
2. Double-click the symbol twice.
If the double-click is valid, the symbol is displayed as follows:
3. If the symbol remains unchanged, double-click on the pattern again.
4. Confirm your entries.
The dialog box closes.
Result
The double-click adjustment is completed.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
91
Configuring the operating system
6.4 Changing settings for operation
6.4.4
Calibrating the Touch Screen
Introduction
Depending on the mounting position and viewing angle, it is possible that parallax may occur
when operating the touch screen. In order to prevent any operating errors as a result,
calibrate the touch screen again in the startup phase or during runtime.
Requirements
You have opened the "Touch" tab in the "OP Properties" dialog box by pressing the "OP"
icon.
①
92
Button for calibrating the touch screen
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.4 Changing settings for operation
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "Recalibrate" button to open the following dialog:
&DUHIXOO\SUHVVDQGEULHIO\KROGVW\OXVRQWKHFHQWHURI
WKHWDUJHW5HSHDWDVWKHWDUJHWPRYHVDURXQGWKHVFUHHQ
2. Briefly touch the middle of the calibration crosshairs ①.
The calibration crosshairs is then displayed at four more positions. Touch the middle of
the calibration crosshairs for each position. If you do not touch the middle of the
calibration crosshairs, the procedure is repeated.
Once you have touched the calibration crosshairs for all positions, the following dialog
appears:
New calibration settings have been measured.
Tape the screen to register saved data.
Wait for 30 seconds to cancel saved data and
keep the current setting.
Time limit: 30 sec
3. Touch the screen within 30 seconds.
The new calibration is saved. If you wait longer than 30 seconds, the new calibration is
discarded and the original calibration remains in effect.
The "OP Properties" dialog, "Touch" tab is displayed again.
4. Close the dialog.
Result
The HMI device touch screen is now recalibrated.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
93
Configuring the operating system
6.5 Changing Password Protection
6.5
Changing Password Protection
Introduction
You can protect the Control Panel and Windows CE taskbar with a password.
Requirements
You have opened the "Password Properties" dialog box by pressing the "Password"
icon.
①
Password text box
②
Text box for entering the password a second time
NOTICE
If the password is no longer available, you cannot do the following until you have updated
the operating system.
• Making changes to the Control Panel
• Operating the Windows CE task bar
All data on the HMI device will be overwritten when you update the operating system!
Procedure for activating password protection
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter a password in the "Password" text box.
2. Repeat the password entry in the "Confirm Password" text box.
3. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
NOTICE
The following characters cannot be used in passwords:
• Blank
• Special characters * ? . % / \ ' "
Result
You cannot open the Control Panel or Windows CE taskbar without entering a password.
94
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.6 Changing HMI device settings
Procedure for deactivating password protection
Proceed as follows:
1. Delete the entries in the "Password" and "Confirm password" text boxes.
2. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
Result
Password protection for the Control Panel and Windows CE taskbar is disabled.
6.6
Changing HMI device settings
6.6.1
Setting the Date and Time
Introduction
You can set the date and time on the HMI device. The HMI must be restarted in the following
cases:
● You have changed the time zone setting.
● You have changed the setting of the "Daylight savings time currently in effect" check box .
Requirement
You have opened the "Date/Time Properties" dialog box by pressing the
"Date/Time Properties"
icon.
①
Time zone
②
Time
③
Date
④
"Daylight savings" check box
⑤
Button for applying changes
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
95
Configuring the operating system
6.6 Changing HMI device settings
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the appropriate time zone for the HMI device in the "Time Zone" selection box.
2. Touch the "Apply" button to confirm your entry.
The time of day shown in the "Current Time" field is adjusted correspondingly to the
selected time zone.
3. Set the date in the selection box.
4. Set the current time of day in the "Current Time" text box.
Note
The system does not automatically switch between standard time and daylight saving
time.
5. If you want to switch from standard time to daylight saving time, select the
"Daylight saving time currently in effect" check box.
When you press the "Apply" button, the time is brought forward by one hour.
6. If you want to switch from daylight saving time to standard time, clear the
"Daylight saving time currently in effect" check box.
When you press the "Apply" button, the time is brought back by one hour.
7. Confirm your entries.
The dialog box closes.
Result
The settings for the date and time of day have now been changed.
Synchronizing the date and time with the PLC
The date and time of the HMI device can be synchronized with the PLC if this has been
configured in the project and the PLC program.
You can find additional information on this subject in the "WinCC flexible" system manual.
NOTICE
You have to synchronize the date and time when time-controlled responses are triggered in
the PLC by the HMI device.
See also
Restarting the HMI Device (Page 105)
96
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.6 Changing HMI device settings
6.6.2
Changing Regional Settings
Introduction
In different countries, for example, the date, time and decimal points are displayed
differently. You can adjust the display format to meet the requirements of different regions.
The country-specific settings apply to the current project. If the project language is changed,
the country-specific settings are also changed.
Requirements
You have opened the "Regional and Language Settings" dialog box by pressing the
"Regional Settings"
icon.
①
Region selection box
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the region from the selection box.
2. Change to the "Number", "Currency", "Time" and "Date" tabs and set the selection boxes
to the desired settings.
3. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
Result
The HMI device's regional settings have been changed.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
97
Configuring the operating system
6.6 Changing HMI device settings
6.6.3
Backing up Registry Information
Registry information and temporary data
You can install and uninstall your own programs on the HMI devices under Windows CE.
You must save the registry settings after installation or uninstallation.
You can save the following data to the flash memory:
● Registry Information
● Temporary files
Restoring the file system of a memory card
If memory cards are used, the file system on the memory card may become damaged,
perhaps due to a power failure. The HMI device detects the defective file system on start-up
or when the memory card is inserted. The HMI device can restore the file system
automatically or on request.
Requirements
You have opened the "Persistent Storage" tab in the "OP Properties" dialog box by pressing
the "OP"
icon.
①
Meaning of the text in the dialog:
Saves the current registry information to the flash memory. The HMI device loads the saved
registry information the next time it boots.
②
Button for saving registry information
③
Button for saving temporary files
④
Meaning of the text in the dialog:
Saves all the files in temporary storage to the flash memory (for example, from the "Program
Files" directory). These files are written back when the HMI device is started. The "\Temp"
directory is not saved.
⑤
98
Check box for automatically restoring the file system on the memory card when the HMI
device starts up and when a memory card is inserted.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.6 Changing HMI device settings
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Save Registry" button to save the current registry settings.
2. Select the "Save Files" button to save temporary files.
3. Specify how the file system on the memory card should be restored.
– Activate the check box "Automatically Repair ..." to activate automatic restore.
– Deactivate the check box "Automatically Repair ..." if you wish to have the files system
restored only upon prompting.
4. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
Result
The HMI device uses the saved registry information the next time it starts. The temporary
files are copied back.
6.6.4
Changing monitor settings
Requirements
You have opened the "OP Properties", dialog "Display" tab with the "OP"
icon.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If you want to increase the brightness, press the "UP" button.
2. If you want to decrease the brightness, press the "DOWN" button.
3. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
Result
The screen settings have been changed.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
99
Configuring the operating system
6.6 Changing HMI device settings
6.6.5
Setting the screen saver
Introduction
You can set the following time intervals on the HMI device:
● For the automatic activation of the screen saver
● For the automatic reduction in the screen's backlighting
When you do not undertake an operation within the configured interval, the configured
function will be activated automatically.
The screen saver and the reduced screen backlighting functions are switched back off by
means of the following actions:
● By pressing any key
● By touching the touch screen
The function associated to the key or button will not be executed by this.
NOTICE
Deterioration of the backlight brightness
The brightness of the backlighting decreases incrementally during its operational life. In
order to increase the operational lifetime of the backlighting, activate the backlighting
reduction.
Burn-in effects
The prolonged display of screen contents can occasionally lead to a burn-in effect in the
background.
This burn-in effect automatically disappears after a certain amount of time, for example,
after the screensaver was activated. The longer the same content is displayed on the
screen, the longer it will take for the burn-in effect to disappear.
Generally, you should always activate the screen saver.
When the screen saver is active, the backlighting is reduced at the same time.
100
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.6 Changing HMI device settings
Requirements
You have opened the "Screensaver" dialog box by pressing the "ScreenSaver"
icon.
①
Time interval in minutes until backlighting is reduced
②
Period of time in minutes before the screen saver is activated
③
Screen saver setting
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the interval in minutes after which the backlighting is to be reduced.
Entering "0" will deactivate the backlighting reduction.
2. Enter the number of minutes before the screen saver is to be activated.
The minimum time is 5 minutes and the maximum time is 71582 minutes.
Entering "0" disables the screen saver.
3. Select either the standard screen saver or an empty screen.
– In order to select the standard screen saver, activate the "Standard" option.
– In order to select an empty screen as screen saver, activate the "Blank Screen"
option.
4. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
Result
The screen saver and the reduced backlighting for the HMI device is set.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
101
Configuring the operating system
6.6 Changing HMI device settings
6.6.6
Changing the Printer Properties
Introduction
HMI devices can print on local printers or network printers. You can print hardcopy and logs
on network printers. Line printing of alarms is not possible on a network printer.
You can find the list of current printers and required settings for HMI devices in the Internet
at "http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/11376409".
Requirement
You have opened the "Printer Properties" dialog box by pressing the "Printer"
icon.
①
Printer selection box
②
Interface
③
Network address of the printer
④
Paper size selection box
⑤
Orientation setting
⑥
Print quality setting
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the printer in the "Printer Language" selection box.
2. Select the port for the printer in the "Port" selection box.
3. If you wish to print via the network, enter "Network:" in the text box the network address
of the printer.
4. Select the paper format in the "Paper Size" selection box.
5. Select the required option button in the "Orientation" group:
– "Portrait" for vertical format
– "Landscape" for horizontal format
6. Select the print quality.
– Select the "Draft Mode" check box if you want to print a draft.
– Clear the "Draft Mode" check box if you want to print with higher quality.
102
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.6 Changing HMI device settings
7. Set the color mode.
– Select the check box "Color" if you wish to print in color.
8. Confirm your entries.
The dialog box closes.
Result
The settings for the printer have now been changed.
6.6.7
Set the volume
Introduction
You can activate an acoustic feedback for keyboard and touch screen operations. With each
touch or activation of a key, an acoustic signal is emitted.
Requirements
You have opened the dialog "Volume & Sounds Properties" using the icon
"Volume & Sounds"
.
①
Check boxes and radio buttons for acoustic feedback when using the keyboard
②
Check boxes and radio buttons for acoustic feedback when using the touch screen
③
Buttons for adjusting the volume
Note
If you deactivate the settings under "Enable sounds for:" no more acoustic signals will be
emitted during inadvertent operations.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
103
Configuring the operating system
6.6 Changing HMI device settings
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. For HMI devices with keys:
– Click the check box "Hardware buttons" to activate the acoustic signal.
– Choose between a loud and soft acoustic signal using the "Loud" and "Soft" radio
buttons.
2. HMI devices with touch screen:
– Activate the "Screen Taps" check box to activate the acoustic signal.
– Choose between a loud and soft acoustic signal using the "Loud" and "Soft" radio
buttons.
3. Choose the required volume using the "Loud" and "Soft" radio buttons.
4. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
Note
The entries in the "Sounds" tab are of no relevance to the HMI device.
Result
The properties of the acoustic operation feedback are now set up.
See also
Overview (Page 161)
104
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.6 Changing HMI device settings
6.6.8
Restarting the HMI Device
Introduction
The HMI device must be restarted in the following cases:
● You have activated or deactivated the PROFINET IO direct keys
● You have changed the time zone setting.
● You have changed the automatic daylight savings and standard setting
CAUTION
Data loss when the HMI device is restarted
All volatile data is lost when the HMI device is rebooted.
Check the following:
• The project on the HMI device is not open
• No data is being written to the flash memory
Requirements
You have opened the "OP Properties" dialog box by pressing the "OP" icon.
Procedure
1. Change to the "Device" tab in the "OP Properties" dialog.
2. Press "Reboot" to restart the HMI device.
A warning is displayed.
The HMI device reboots immediately if you confirm this warning.
Result
The HMI device starts.
See also
Enabling PROFINET IO (Page 117)
Setting the Date and Time (Page 95)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
105
Configuring the operating system
6.6 Changing HMI device settings
6.6.9
Displaying Information about the HMI Device
Introduction
You will need the device-specific information when you contact Technical Support.
Requirement
You have opened the "Device" tab in the "OP Properties" dialog box by pressing the
icon.
"OP"
①
HMI device name
②
Version of the HMI device image
③
Version of the boot loader
④
Boot loader release date
⑤
Size of the internal flash memory in which the HMI device image and project are stored
⑥
MAC address of the HMI device
⑦
Button for restarting the HMI device
Dialog "OP Properties", tab "Device", example MP 277 10" Key
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. The device-specific information is displayed in the "Device" tab.
2. Close the dialog when the information is no longer required.
Note
The size of the internal flash memory does not correspond to the available working
memory for a project.
106
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.6 Changing HMI device settings
6.6.10
Displaying System Properties
Introduction
The system-specific information provides you with information about the processor,
operating system and memory of the HMI device.
Requirements
You have opened the "System Properties" dialog box by pressing the "System"
icon.
①
Copyright to Microsoft Windows CE
②
Information about the processor, size of the internal flash memory, and capacity of a memory
card when inserted
Displaying the system information
The system information is displayed. This dialog is read-only.
Close the dialog.
Procedure for displaying memory information
NOTICE
"Memory" tab
Do not change the memory distribution in the "Memory" tab.
Only applies for the usage of options:
An alteration to the memory distribution may be necessary. Please refer to the
accompanying documentation for further information.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
107
Configuring the operating system
6.7 Setting the Delay Time
Proceed as follows:
1. Change to the "Memory" tab.
The memory information is displayed.
2. Close the dialog.
6.7
Setting the Delay Time
Introduction
The project is opened following a delay time when the HMI device is switched on. The
Loader is displayed during the delay time.
Requirements
You have opened the "Directories" tab in the "Transfer Settings" dialog box by pressing the
"Transfer"
icon.
①
Directory where the project file is saved
②
Directory where the compressed source file of your project is saved
The external memory card or the network connection can be defined as the storage location.
During the next backup process, the project's source file is stored in the specified location.
108
③
Storage location and initialization file of the HMI device for process operation
④
Region selection box
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.8 Setting the uninterruptible power supply
NOTICE
Settings in "Project File" and "Path"
Do not change the setting in the "Project File" and "Path" fields. The project may not open
at the next start of the HMI device if changes are made here.
Procedure for setting the delay time
1. Select the desired delay time in seconds in the "Wait [sec]" selection box.
With the value "0", the project starts immediately. It is then no longer possible to call the
Loader after switching on the HMI device. If you still wish to access the Loader, an
operating element must be configured to close the project.
2. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
Result
The delay time for the HMI device is now set.
6.8
Setting the uninterruptible power supply
Introduction
UPS monitoring is an option you load as an add-on with ProSave.
A UPS ensures that the HMI device is shut down in a controlled manner after a buffer time in
the event of a power failure. This avoids the loss of data.
The following uninterruptible power supplies are supported:
SITOP DC UPS modules as of a rated power value of 6 A, e.g. 6EP1931-2DC42
Connect the UPS to the 24-V input and a USB port. Configure the USB port for UPS
monitoring.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
109
Configuring the operating system
6.8 Setting the uninterruptible power supply
Requirements
You have opened the "UPS Properties", dialog "Configuration" tab with the "UPS"
icon.
①
Text box for the time after which the "Battery mode activated" message is displayed
②
Check box for enabling battery mode
③
Text box for the time after which the "Faulty port" message is displayed
④
Check box for the "Faulty port" message
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If you want to enable battery mode, activate the "Battery mode" check box.
2. Enter the time for terminating applications in the "min" and "s" text boxes.
You will receive a message when UPS takes effect. Applications such as HMI Runtime
and WinAC MP are then terminated depending on the time entered.
3. If the port to which the UPS is connected is faulty and you therefore want to receive a
message, activate the "Port disturbed" check box.
4. Select the message you want from the list box.
5. Enter the time after which the "Faulty port" message is displayed in the "min" and "s" text
boxes.
Result
Port monitoring for the UPS is set.
110
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.9 State of uninterruptible power supply
6.9
State of uninterruptible power supply
Introduction
If you have connected a UPS to a USB port, you can display the monitoring state of this port.
Requirements
You have opened the "UPS Properties", dialog "Current status" tab with the "UPS"
icon.
①
The "UPS program is not running. No current status available." message appears when the
UPS is not connected.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Installing the UPS monitoring software.
2. Connect the UPS.
3. If you want to update the monitoring state, press the "Update" button.
The message is changed according to the current setting. The message will remain
unchanged if no check boxes in the "Configuration" tab have been activated.
Result
The current monitoring state for the UPS is displayed.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
111
Configuring the operating system
6.10 Change the communication settings
6.10
Change the communication settings
6.10.1
Changing S7 transfer settings
Introduction
The communication settings between the HMI device and PLC are defined in the HMI device
project. In the following cases, the communication settings might have to be changed:
● The first time the project is transferred
● If changes are made to the project but are only applied later
NOTICE
Transfer mode using MPI/PROFIBUS DP
The bus parameters are read from the project currently loaded on the HMI device.
You can change the settings for MPI / PROFIBUS DP transfer. The following steps are
required:
• Close the project.
• Change the settings on the HMI device.
• Then return to "Transfer" mode.
The changed MP/PROFIBUS DP settings will be overwritten in the following cases:
• The project is started again
• A project is transferred
Transfer settings
A project can only be transferred from the configuration PC to the HMI device when at
least one of the data channels is enabled on the HMI device.
If the HMI device is in "Transfer" mode while changes are made to the transfer settings,
the settings only go into effect after the transfer function is restarted.
112
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.10 Change the communication settings
Requirement
You have opened the "S7-Transfer Settings" dialog box by pressing the
"S7-Transfer Settings"
icon.
①
Network selection
②
Button for opening the properties dialog
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select a network.
– If you have selected "S7 Ethernet", click the "Properties" button to open the
"SMC LAN91C111 Ethernet Settings" dialog and proceed as described in the
Changing the Network Configuration (Page 122) section to edit the Ethernet settings.
– If you have selected "MPI" or "PROFIBUS", proceed with the tasks described below.
2. Open the "MPI" or "PROFIBUS" dialog with the "Properties" button:
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
113
Configuring the operating system
6.10 Change the communication settings
3. If more masters are connected to the bus, deactivate the check box "Panel is the only
master on the bus".
4. Enter the bus address for the HMI device in the "Address" text box.
NOTICE
The bus address in the "Address" text box must be unique throughout the
MPI/PROFIBUS DP network.
5. Select the transmission rate in the "Transmission Rate" text box.
6. Select the highest station address on the bus in the "Highest Station Address" or "Highest
Station" text box.
7. Select the desired profile from the "Profile" selection box.
8. The profile information is displayed when you select "Bus Parameters" button in the
PROFIBUS dialog. The "Profile" dialog is read-only.
NOTICE
The bus parameters must be the same for all stations in the MPI/PROFIBUS DP
network.
9. Close the "Profile" dialog.
10. Confirm your entries in the "MPI" or "PROFIBUS" dialog.
The dialog box closes.
Result
The MPI/PROFIBUS DP settings of the HMI device have been changed.
114
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.10 Change the communication settings
6.10.2
Configuring the data channel
Introduction
If you block all data channels, the HMI device is protected against unintentional overwriting
of the project data and HMI device image.
Note
A project can only be transferred from the configuration PC to the HMI device when at least
one of the data channels is enabled on the HMI device.
Requirement
You have opened the "Transfer Settings" dialog box by pressing the "Transfer Settings"
icon.
①
Group for data channel 1 (Channel 1)
②
Group for data channel 2 (Channel 2)
③
Button for the dialog "S7 Transfer Settings" or "Network and Dial-Up Connections."
Note
"Remote Control" for channel 1
Only select the "Remote Control" check box in the "Channel 1" group, if serial transfer is in
progress. Clear the check box before changing to "Online" mode.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
115
Configuring the operating system
6.10 Change the communication settings
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. You can clear the required data channel by activating the associated "Enable Channel"
check box in the "Channel 1" or "Channel 2" group.
In the "Channel 1" group, the RS-422/RS-485 port is configured for the serial data
transfer.
– Select the "Enable Channel" check box to enable the data channel.
– Clear the "Enable Channel" check box to lock the data channel.
2. Enable automatic transfer by activating the respective "Remote Control" check box in the
"Channel 1" or "Channel 2" group.
WARNING
Unintentional transfer mode
Ensure that the configuration PC does not inadvertently switch the HMI device to
transfer mode while the project is in runtime. This could cause unintentional actions to
be triggered in the plant.
3. Select the required protocol for "Channel 2" in the selection box.
4. Enter further parameters if required.
– Applies to "MPI/Profibus/S7-Ethernet:"
Press the "Advanced" button to change to the "S7-Transfer Settings" dialog. There
you can change the settings for MPI/PROFIBUS or S7 Ethernet.
Confirm your entries.
The "S7-Transfer Settings" dialog box closes.
– Applies to "ETHERNET":
Press the "Advanced" button to change to the "Network&Dial-Up Connections."
Open the "LAN9001" entry. You can change the TCP/IP settings there.
Confirm your entries.
Close "Network&Dial-Up Connections".
– Applies to "USB:"
No further settings are required for "USB".
5. Confirm your entries.
The dialog box closes.
Result
The data channel is configured.
116
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.10 Change the communication settings
General information
Note
Changes during "Transfer" mode
If the HMI device is in "Transfer" mode while changes are made to the transfer settings, the
settings only go into effect after the transfer function is restarted.
This may occur if the Control Panel is opened to change the transfer properties in an active
project.
NOTICE
Serial transfer mode via channel 2
The bus parameters, for example address of the HMI device, are read out of the project
that is currently running on the HMI device.
You can change the settings for the transfer via channel 2.
The following steps are required:
• Close the project.
• Change the settings on the HMI device.
• Then return to "Transfer" mode.
The next time the project is started on the HMI device, the settings will be overwritten by
the values from the project.
See also
Changing S7 transfer settings (Page 112)
Changing the Network Configuration (Page 122)
Operating modes (Page 138)
6.10.3
Enabling PROFINET IO
PROFINET IO
If the HMI device is connected to the PLC via PROFINET, function keys or buttons, for
example, can be configured as PROFINET IO direct keys. If PROFINET IO direct keys are
used in the project, they must be enabled.
Note
If you enable PROFINET IO direct keys, you cannot use the RS 422/RS 485 port for serial
communication.
PROFINET IO direct keys and PROFIBUS DP direct keys are mutually exclusive.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
117
Configuring the operating system
6.10 Change the communication settings
Requirement
You have opened the "PROFINET" dialog with the "PROFINET"
icon.
①
Enabling or disabling the PROFINET IO direct keys
②
Text box for the device name
③
MAC address of the HMI device
NOTICE
Inconsistent device name
If the device name does not match the device name entered in the HW Config of STEP 7,
the direct keys do not work.
Use the device name from the HW Config of STEP 7. This device name does not
correspond to the device name used under Windows CE.
Within the ETHERNET data network, the device name must be unique and satisfy the DNS
conventions. These include:
● Restriction to 127 characters in total (letters, digits, hyphen or point)
● A name component within the device name, e.g. a string between two points, may not
exceed 63 characters.
● Special characters such as umlauts, brackets, underscores, slashes, spaces etc. are not
permitted. The hyphen is the one exception.
● The device name must not start or end with a the "-" character.
● The device name must not take the form n.n.n.n (n = 0 to 999).
● The device name must not start with the character sequence "port-xyz-" (x, y, z = 0 to 9).
Procedure
1. If you want to enable the PROFINET IO direct keys, select the "PROFINET IO" check
box.
2. Enter the device name of the HMI device.
3. Confirm your entries.
The dialog box closes.
4. Reboot the HMI device after saving the settings.
Result
The PROFINET IO direct keys are enabled.
118
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.11 Configuring network operation
See also
Restarting the HMI Device (Page 105)
6.11
Configuring network operation
6.11.1
Overview of network operation
Introduction
You can connect the HMI device to a PROFINET network via the Ethernet port.
The connection to a network offers, for example, the following options:
● Printing via a network printer
● Saving, exporting and importing of recipe data records on or from a server
● Setting up of message and data archives
● Transferring a project
● Saving data
NOTICE
The HMI device can only be used in PROFINET networks.
The HMI device only has client functionality in the PC network. This means that users
can access files of a node with TCP/IP server functionality from the HMI device via the
network. However, you cannot, for example, access data on the HMI device from a PC
via the network.
Note
Information on communication using SIMATIC S7 via PROFINET is provided in the
"WinCC flexible communication" user manual.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
119
Configuring the operating system
6.11 Configuring network operation
Addressing
Within a PROFINET network, computers are usually addressed using computer names.
These computer names are translated from a DNS or WINS server to TCP/IP addresses.
This is why a DNS or WINS server is needed for addressing via computer names when the
HMI device is in a PROFINET network.
The corresponding servers are generally available in PROFINET networks.
Note
The use of TCP/IP addresses to address PCs is not supported by the operating system.
Consult your network administrator if you have questions in this regard
Printing via a network printer
The HMI device's operating system does not support line by line alarm logging via a network
printer. All other printing functions, for example hardcopy or logs are available without
restriction via the network.
Preparation
Before beginning the configuration, request the following network parameters from your
network administrator.
● Does the network use DHCP for dynamic assignment of network addresses?
If not, get a new TCP/IP network address for the HMI device.
● Which TCP/IP address does the default gateway have?
● If a DNS network is used, what are the addresses of the name server?
● If a WINS network is used, what are the addresses of the name server?
General procedure for configuring the network
The HMI device must be configured prior to network operation. The configuration is basically
divided into the following steps:
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the computer name of the HMI device.
2. Configure the network address.
3. Set the logon information.
4. Save the settings.
120
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.11 Configuring network operation
6.11.2
Setting the device name of the HMI device
Introduction
The HMI device uses the device name to identify itself in the network.
Requirements
You have opened the "System Properties" dialog box by pressing the "System"
icon.
①
Device name of the HMI device
②
Description for the HMI device (optional)
Note
Change the device name for the HMI device in the "Device name" text box to activate the
network functions.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the device name for the HMI device in the "Device name" text box.
2. Enter a description for the HMI device in the "Device description" text box.
3. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
Result
The device name for the HMI device is now set.
See also
Overview of network operation (Page 119)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
121
Configuring the operating system
6.11 Configuring network operation
6.11.3
Changing the Network Configuration
Overview
You can change the network settings for the LAN connection under "Network & Dial-Up
Connections".
Requirement - changing LAN connection settings
You have pressed the "Network&Dial-Up Connections"
icon to open the following view.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "LAN90001" entry.
– The "'SMC LAN91C111 Ethernet' Settings" dialog opens.
2. Select either automatic address assignment via DHCP or manual address assignment.
3. If you assign the address manually, enter the respective addresses in the text boxes for
"IP Address", "Subnet Mask" and, if used, "Default Gateway".
4. If a name server is used in the network, change to the "Name Servers" tab.
122
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.11 Configuring network operation
5. Enter the respective addresses in the text boxes.
6. Change to the "Ethernet Parameters" tab.
7. In the "Mode and Speed" selection list, select the transmission speed and mode.
8. Confirm your entries.
The dialog box closes.
9. Close the "Network&Dial-Up Connections" view.
The Control Panel is displayed again.
Result
The LAN connection parameters for the HMI device have been changed.
See also
Overview of network operation (Page 119)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
123
Configuring the operating system
6.11 Configuring network operation
6.11.4
Changing the Logon Data
Introduction
Windows CE uses this information to gain access to the network resources. Enter the user
name, password and domain you have received from your administrator.
Requirements
You have opened the "Network ID" dialog box by pressing the "Network ID"
icon.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the user name in the "User name" text box.
2. Enter your password in the "Password" text box.
3. Enter the domain name in the "Domain" text box.
4. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
Result
The logon information has now been set.
See also
Overview of network operation (Page 119)
124
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.11 Configuring network operation
6.11.5
Changing E-Mail Settings
Requirement
You have opened the "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" dialog box by pressing the
"WinCC Internet Settings"
icon.
①
Setting the SMTP server
②
Name for the sender
③
E-mail account
Note
Options
The "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" tab can contain additional tabs. This depends on the
options that have been enabled for network operation in the project.
Procedure – changing e-mail settings
Proceed as follows:
1. Specify the SMTP server.
– Select the "Use the default of the project file" option button if you want to use the
SMTP server configured in the project.
– Deactivate the "Use the default of the project file" option button if you do not want to
use the SMTP server configured in the project.
– Specify the required SMTP server.
2. Enter the name for the sender in the "Name of sender" text box.
3. Enter the e-mail account for your e-mail in the "E-mail address of sender" text box.
Some e-mail providers only allow you to send mail if you specify the e-mail account. The
"E-mail address of sender" text box can remain empty if your e-mail provider allows you
to send mail without checking the account.
4. Confirm your entries.
The dialog box closes.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
125
Configuring the operating system
6.11 Configuring network operation
Result
The e-mail settings have been changed.
See also
Overview of network operation (Page 119)
6.11.6
Changing internet settings
6.11.6.1
Changing General Internet Settings
Requirements
You have opened the "General" tab in the "Internet Options" dialog box by pressing the
"Internet Options"
icon.
Note
Do not change the settings in the "User Agent" field.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the required start page for the browser in the "Start Page" text box.
2. Enter the address of the required search engine in the "Search Page" field.
3. Enter the required cache memory size in the "Cache" text box.
4. The cache can be deleted by means of the "Clear Cache" button.
5. The history can be deleted by means of the "Clear History" button.
6. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
126
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.11 Configuring network operation
Result
The general parameters for the Internet browser have been set.
See also
Overview of network operation (Page 119)
6.11.6.2
Setting the Proxy Server
Requirements
You have opened the "Connection" tab in the "Internet Options" dialog box by pressing the
"Internet Options"
icon.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Activate the "Use LAN (no autodial)" check box.
2. If you use a proxy server, activate the "Access the Internet using a proxy server" check
box in the network group.
Specify the address of the proxy server and the port.
Note
The proxy settings in the Control Panel apply to all applications that are running on the
HMI device.
The Pocket Internet Explorer requires independent proxy settings that you must specify in
the properties of the Pocket Internet Explorer. You can find additional information at the
Microsoft's website.
3. If you want to bypass the proxy server for local addresses, activate the
"Bypass proxy server for local addresses" checkbox.
4. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
127
Configuring the operating system
6.11 Configuring network operation
See also
Overview of network operation (Page 119)
6.11.6.3
Changing Privacy Settings
Cookies and encryption
Cookies are pieces of information sent by a web server to a browser. In the event of
subsequent access to the web server, the cookies are sent back. This enables information to
be stored between the accesses.
In order to ensure a high level of privacy, data are sent via the Internet in encrypted form.
Common encryption protocols include SSL and TLS. You can activate or deactivate the
usage of encryption protocols.
The required settings can be obtained from your network administrator.
Requirements
You have opened the "Privacy" tab in the "Internet Options" dialog box by pressing the
"Internet Options"
icon.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the required cookie behavior by means of the option buttons.
– "Accept"
Cookies are stored without request.
– "Block"
Cookies will not be stored.
– "Prompt"
Cookies will be stored on request.
2. If you want allow cookies which are restricted to a single session, activate the "Always
allow session cookies" checkbox.
128
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.11 Configuring network operation
3. Change to the "Advanced" tab.
4. Activate the required encryption protocol.
5. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
Result
The logon information has now been set.
See also
Overview of network operation (Page 119)
6.11.6.4
Importing and Deleting Certificates
Overview
You can import, view and delete certificates that have been imported for the HMI device. The
certificates differ in the following ways:
● Certificates that you trust
● Own certificates
● Other certificates
You can import additional certificates and delete certificates that are not required.
The required settings can be obtained from your network administrator.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
129
Configuring the operating system
6.11 Configuring network operation
Requirements
You have opened the "Certificates" dialog box by pressing the "Certificates"
icon.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the type of certificate from the selection box:
– "Trusted Authorities"
– "My Certificates"
– "Other Certificates"
2. You can start the import by pressing the "Import" button.
A dialog with source details will open.
3. If required, delete the certificate.
– Mark the desired certificate.
– Delete the selected certificate by pressing the "Remove" button.
4. Press the "View" button to list the properties of the selected certificate.
5. Close the dialog.
Result
The changes to the certificates have been undertaken.
See also
Overview of network operation (Page 119)
130
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.12 Saving to external storage device (backup)
6.12
Saving to external storage device (backup)
Introduction
A backup involves copying the operating system, applications and data from the internal in
flash memory of the HMI device to an external storage device.
The following external storage devices are possible:
● External memory
● USB memory stick
Requirements
● The HMI device features an external storage device with sufficient free space.
● You have opened the "Backup/Restore" dialog with the "Backup/Restore"
icon.
Procedure - using a memory card for the first time
NOTICE
Loss of data possible
The first time you use a memory card the HMI device will request that you format the card.
Save a backup copy of memory card data to a PC before formatting.
Proceed as follows:
1. Cancel the formatting procedure by pressing "ESC".
2. Remove the memory card from the HMI device.
3. Save a backup copy of vital data to a PC.
4. Insert the memory card into the HMI device.
5. Format the memory card on the HMI device.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
131
Configuring the operating system
6.12 Saving to external storage device (backup)
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the "BACKUP" button to open the "Select Storage Card" dialog.
The "--- no storage card available ---" message appears if there is no external memory in
the HMI device or if this memory is defective. Insert an external memory or a different
one.
2. Select the external memory for backup from the "Please select a Storage Card" list box.
3. Click on the "Start Backup" button.
The HMI device checks the external memory.
If the "This storage card..." message appears, an external memory with a greater memory
capacity is needed. Acknowledge this message. Backup is aborted. Insert an external
memory with a greater memory capacity and restart the backup process.
If the "You may have an old backup on the storage card. Do you want to delete it?"
message appears, there is already a backup on the external memory. If you do not want
to overwrite the backup, press the "No" button. Otherwise click on the "Yes" button.
Several messages are displayed in sequence during the backup process:
– Saving registry data
– Copy files
A progress bar shows the status of the backup process. When the backup process is
completed, the following message is displayed:
"The operation completed successfully."
4. Acknowledge this message.
The dialog closes.
Result
The HMI device data is now saved on the external memory.
132
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.13 Restoring from external storage device
6.13
Restoring from external storage device
Introduction
A restore operation deletes the old data from flash memory of the HMI device on
confirmation. The data stored on the external memory is then copied to the internal flash
Flash memory.
Requirements
● The external memory holding the backed up data is inserted in the HMI device.
● You have opened the "Backup/Restore" dialog with the "Backup/Restore"
icon.
NOTICE
Loss of data possible
All data on the HMI device will be deleted during a restore operation. License keys are
deleted after counter-inquiry.
Back up the HMI device's data before restoring if required.
External memory with data backup
If several external memories with data backups are plugged in, the data cannot be
restored.
Remove the external memory with the data backups not needed.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
133
Configuring the operating system
6.13 Restoring from external storage device
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the "RESTORE" button to open the "Storage Card" dialog.
①
No storage card available
②
Only one storage card containing backup is allowed. No storage card detected. Insert a
storage card and press the "Refresh" button.
2. Select the external memory with the backup from the "Storage Card with Backup
detected" selection box.
The "--- no storage card available ---" message appears if there is no external memory in
the HMI device or if this memory is defective.
3. If the "--- no storage card available ---" message appears, press the "Cancel" button.
Restoring is then aborted.
– Insert a memory card or a different one.
– Click on the "Refresh" button.
The content of the selection box will be changed.
– Select the external memory with the backup from the "Storage Card with Backup
detected" selection box.
4. Click on the "Start Restore" button.
Restoring is started.
5. The data to be restored is checked.
The following messages are displayed in sequence during the check.
– "Starting Restore"
– "Checking data"
When the data has been checked, the following message is displayed:
"You are starting RESTORE now. All files (except files on storage cards) and the registry
will be erased. Are you sure?"
The message means that the restore process can be started. All files files except those
located on the external memory will be deleted. Tab entries are also deleted. Are you
sure?
134
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Configuring the operating system
6.13 Restoring from external storage device
6. If you do not want to allow the data to be deleted from the HMI device, abort the restore
process by pressing the "ESC" button.
7. Start to restore the data by selecting "Yes".
The following messages are displayed in sequence during the restore:
– "Deleting files on flash"
– "Restore CE Image"
A progress bar shows the status of the restore process.
When restore is completed, the following message is displayed:
"Restore succesfully finished. Press ok, remove your storage card and reboot your
device."
8. Remove the external memory.
9. Acknowledge this message.
The HMI device starts.
Result
The data from the external memory is now on the HMI device.
Note
Calibrating the touch screen
After the reset, you may have to recalibrate the touch screen.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
135
Configuring the operating system
6.14 Activate Memory Management
6.14
Activate Memory Management
Memory management
If reorganization of the memory is required during the runtime of project, the HMI device can
shut down the project autonomously.
The project is shut down and the HMI device will display a message. You have to restart the
project.
NOTICE
If you do not activate memory management, undefined states can occur during the runtime
of the project.
Requirements
You have opened the "Memory Monitoring" tab in the "OP Properties" dialog box by pressing
the "OP"
icon.
①
The maximum used memory since last power on of the HMI device and the current used
memory in percent.
②
Control box for activation of memory management
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. In order to start memory management, activate the control box.
2. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
Result
Memory management is activated.
136
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Commissioning a project
7.1
7
Overview
Configuration phase
A project – the process image of the working process – is produced during configuration to
visualize automated working processes. The process displays for the project contain
displays for values and messages which provide information about process statuses. The
process control phase follows the configuration phase.
Process control phase
The project must be transferred to the HMI device if it is to be used in process control.
Another precondition for process control is that the HMI device is connected online to a
controller. Current working processes - operating and observing - can then be subject to
process control.
Transferring the project to the HMI device
You can transfer a project to an HMI device as follows:
● Transfer from the configuring PC
● Restore from a PC using ProSave
In this case, an archived project is transferred from a PC to the HMI device. The
configuration software need not be installed on this PC.
Commissioning and recommissioning
Initial and re-start-ups differ in the following respects:
● When the HMI device is commissioned there is no project at first.
The HMI device is also in this state after the operating system has been updated.
● When recommissioning, any project already on the HMI device is replaced.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
137
Commissioning a project
7.2 Operating modes
7.2
Operating modes
Operating modes
The HMI device may be in the following operating modes:
● Offline
● Online
● Transfer
"Offline mode" and "Online mode" can be set on both the configuring PC and the HMI
device. To set these modes on the HMI device, use a corresponding operating element of
the project.
Changing the operating mode
The configuration engineer must have configured an appropriate operating element to allow
a change of the operating mode on the HMI device during ongoing operation.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation
"Offline" operating mode
In this mode, there is no communication between the HMI device and PLC. Although the
HMI device can be operated, it cannot exchange data with the PLC.
"Online" operating mode
In this mode, the HMI device and PLC communicate. You can operate the plant on the HMI
device according to your system configuration.
"Transfer" mode
In this mode, you can transfer a project from the configuring PC to the HMI device or backup
and restore HMI device data, for example.
The following options are available for setting "Transfer" mode on the HMI device:
● When the HMI device starts up
Start "Transfer" mode manually in the HMI device Loader.
● During ongoing operation
Start the "Transfer" mode manually within the project using an operating element. The
HMI device toggles to "Transfer" mode when automatic mode is set and a transfer is
initiated on the configuring PC.
138
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Commissioning a project
7.3 Using existing projects
7.3
Using existing projects
The following table shows how you can reuse existing projects, while observing the screen
size:
HMI device in the existing project
New HMI device
TP 270 10"
MP 277 10" Touch or MP 277 8" Touch
OP 270 10"
MP 277 10" Key
MP 270 6" Touch
TP 277 6" 1)
MP 270 10" Touch
MP 277 10" Touch or MP 277 8" Touch
MP 270 10" Key
MP 277 10" Key
1)
If you have set options on the MP 270 6" Touch, you must use the MP 277 8" Touch as the
successor.
The following cases are possible:
1. Project in ProTool exists:
Migrate the project to WinCC flexible and subsequently carry out an HMI device switch.
2. Project in WinCC flexible exists:
Carry out an HMI device switch in WinCC flexible.
Further information on the subject can be found in the WinCC flexible Online Help or in the
"WinCC flexible Migration" manual.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
139
Commissioning a project
7.4 Data Transmission Options
7.4
Data Transmission Options
Overview
The following table shows the options for data transfer between the MP 277 and the
configuration PC.
Type
Data channel
Backup
Serial 1)
Yes
MPI/PROFIBUS-DP
Yes
Restoring
Update operating system.
USB
Yes
Ethernet
Yes
Serial 1)
Yes
MPI/PROFIBUS-DP
Yes
USB
Yes
Ethernet
Yes
Serial, with reset to factory state1)
Yes
Serial
Yes
1)
MPI/PROFIBUS-DP
Yes
USB
Yes
Ethernet
Transferring a project
Serial
1)
MPI/PROFIBUS-DP
Installing or removing an option
License key transferring or
transferring back
1)
140
MP 277
Yes
Yes
Yes
USB
Yes
Ethernet
Yes
Serial 1)
Yes
MPI/PROFIBUS-DP
Yes
USB
Yes
Ethernet
Yes
Serial 1)
Yes
MPI/PROFIBUS-DP
Yes
USB
Yes
Ethernet
Yes
Applies when PC/PPI cable is used
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Commissioning a project
7.5 Transfer
7.5
Transfer
7.5.1
Overview
Transfer
Transfer the executable project from the configuring PC to the HMI device.
You can start the "Transfer" mode manually or automatically on the HMI device.
Transferred data is written directly to the internal flash memory on the HMI device. For the
transfer, you use a data channel which you have to configure before starting a transfer.
Backtransfer
You have the option to transfer the compressed project file together with the runtime project
to the HMI device. If necessary, the compressed project file can be transferred back to the
configuring PC and edited.
The HMI device must be equipped with an external memory card to which the compressed
project file can be saved.
NOTICE
Compressed project file
WinCC flexible does not check whether the compressed project file stored on the HMI
device corresponds to the existing runtime project.
7.5.2
Starting manual transfer
Introduction
You can manually switch the HMI device to "Transfer" mode as follows:
● With a configured operating element during ongoing operation.
● In the Loader of the HMI device.
Requirements
● The project "*.hmi" is opened in WinCC flexible.
● The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC
● The data channel is configured on the HMI device
● The HMI device is in "Transfer" mode
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
141
Commissioning a project
7.5 Transfer
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Transfer settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
The "Select devices for transfer" dialog opens.
2. Select the HMI device in the left area of the dialog.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC.
Set the connection parameters.
4. Set the transfer parameters in the right area of the dialog.
5. If you wish to transfer the compressed project file together with the runtime project to the
HMI device:
Select the "Enable backtransfer" check box.
6. Start transfer in WinCC flexible with "Transfer".
The configuring PC checks the connection to the HMI device. The project is transferred to
the HMI device. If the connection is not available or is defective, an error message is
displayed on the configuring PC.
Result
When the transfer is completed successfully, the project can be found on the HMI device.
The transferred project is then started automatically.
See also
Operating modes (Page 138)
Configuring the data channel (Page 115)
Data Transmission Options (Page 140)
7.5.3
Starting automatic transfer
Introduction
The HMI device can be automatically switched to "Transfer" mode during runtime as soon as
transfer is started on the configuring PC connected.
Automatic transfer is particularly suited for the test phase of a new project since transfer is
completed without interfering with the HMI device.
142
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Commissioning a project
7.5 Transfer
Automatic transfer is available for the following data channels:
● Serial
● MPI/PROFIBUS DP
● USB
● Ethernet
NOTICE
If the automatic transfer has been activated on the HMI device and a transfer is initiated
on the configuring PC, the project currently running is automatically stopped. The HMI
device then automatically switches to "Transfer" mode.
After the commissioning phase, deactivate the automatic transfer so that the HMI device
cannot be inadvertently switched to transfer mode. The transfer mode can trigger
unintentional actions in the device.
You can set a password for the Loader of the HMI device to restrict access to the
transfer settings and thus avoid unauthorized modifications.
Requirements
● The project *.hmi is opened in WinCC flexible.
● The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC
● The data channel is configured on the HMI device
● The automatic transfer is activated in the data channel for the transfer.
● The project is started on the HMI device.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Transfer settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
The "Select devices for transfer" dialog opens.
2. Select the HMI device in the left area of the dialog.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC.
Set the connection parameters.
4. Set the transfer parameters in the right area of the dialog.
5. If you wish to transfer the compressed project file together with the runtime project to the
HMI device:
Select the "Enable backtransfer" check box.
6. Start transfer in WinCC flexible with "Transfer".
The configuring PC checks the connection to the HMI device. The HMI device shuts
down the current project and automatically switches to "Transfer" mode The project is
transferred to the HMI device. If the connection is not available or is defective, an error
message is displayed on the configuring PC.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
143
Commissioning a project
7.5 Transfer
Result
When the transfer is completed successfully, the project can be found on the HMI device.
The transferred project is then started automatically.
See also
Operating modes (Page 138)
Configuring the data channel (Page 115)
Data Transmission Options (Page 140)
7.5.4
Starting backtransfer
Requirements
● No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible
● The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC
● The data channel is configured on the HMI device
● The HMI device is in "Transfer" mode
● The memory card containing the compressed project file is inserted into the HMI device
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
The "Communication Settings" dialog opens.
2. Select the type of HMI device.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC.
Set the connection parameters.
4. Close the dialog with "OK".
5. Select the "Transfer" > "Backtransfer" command in the "Project" menu.
The "Backtransfer" dialog opens.
6. Click "OK" to start the backtransfer process.
The configuring PC checks the connection to the HMI device. The compressed project file
is transferred back from the HMI device to the configuring PC. If the connection is not
available or is defective, an error message is displayed on the configuring PC.
Result
After successful backtransfer, the project is opened on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible.
144
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Commissioning a project
7.5 Transfer
7.5.5
Testing a project
Introduction
There are two options to test a project:
● Test the project on the configuring PC
You can test a project at a configuring PC, using a simulator. For detailed information,
refer to the "WinCC flexible" user manual and to the WinCC flexible Online Help.
● Offline testing of the project on the HMI device
Offline testing means that communication between the HMI device and PLC is down
while the test is being carried out.
● Online testing of the project on the HMI device
Online testing means that the HMI device and PLC communicate with each other during
testing.
Perform the tests, starting with the "Offline test", followed by the "Online test".
Note
You should always test the project on the HMI device on which the project will be used.
Check the following:
1. Check the correct layout of the screens
2. Check the screen navigation
3. Check the input objects
4. Enter the tag values
The test increases the certainty that the project will run error-free on the HMI device.
Requirements for offline testing
● The project has been transferred to the HMI device
● The HMI device is in "Offline" mode
Procedure
In "Offline" mode, you can test individual project functions on the HMI device without them
being affected by the PLC. PLC tags, therefore, are not updated.
Test the operating elements and visualization of the project as far as possible without
connecting to the PLC.
Requirements for online testing
● The project has been transferred to the HMI device
● The HMI device is in "Online" mode
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
145
Commissioning a project
7.6 Backup and restore
Procedure
In "Online" mode, you can test individual project functions on the HMI device without them
being affected by the PLC. PLC tags are updated in this case.
You have the option to test all communication-dependent functions, for example alarms, etc.
Test the operating elements and views of the project.
7.6
Backup and restore
7.6.1
Overview
Backup and restore
NOTICE
License keys
License keys are not taken into account for backups and restores. License keys are saved
in the working memory of the HMI device and cannot be deleted.
You can back up and restore the following data found in the internal flash memory of the HMI
device with a PC:
● Project and HMI device image
● Password list
● Recipe data
Use one of the following tools for backup and restore:
● WinCC flexible
● ProSave
General information
NOTICE
Power failure
If a complete restore operation is interrupted due to power failure on the HMI device, the
operating system of the HMI device may be deleted! The operating system then has to be
updated.
Compatibility conflict
If a message is output on the HMI device warning of a compatibility conflict during the
restore operation, the operating system must be updated.
146
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Commissioning a project
7.6 Backup and restore
7.6.2
Backup and restore using WinCC flexible
Requirements
● The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC
● No project is open in WinCC flexible
● The data channel is configured on the HMI device
Procedure for backup
Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
The "Communication Settings" dialog opens.
2. Select the type of HMI device.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC.
Set the connection parameters.
4. Close the dialog with "OK".
5. Select the "Backup" command in the menu "Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
The "Backup Settings" dialog opens.
6. Select the data to be backed up.
7. Select a destination folder and a file name for the "*.psb" backup file.
8. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the HMI device automatically
sets "Transfer" mode when a backup is initiated.
9. Start the backup operation in WinCC flexible with "OK" on the configuring PC.
Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible.
A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation.
Result
The system outputs a message when the backup is completed.
The relevant data is now backed up on the configuring PC.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
147
Commissioning a project
7.6 Backup and restore
Procedure for restore
Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
The "Communication Settings" dialog opens.
2. Select the type of HMI device.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC.
Set the connection parameters.
4. Close the dialog with "OK".
5. Select the "Restore" command in the menu "Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
The "Restore Settings" dialog opens.
6. Select the "*.psb" backup file to be restored from the "Open" field.
You can see the HMI device for which the backup file was created and the type of backup
data the file contains.
7. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when a restore operation is initiated.
8. Start the restore operation in WinCC flexible with "OK" on the configuring PC.
Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible.
A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation.
Result
When the restore is successfully completed, the data backed up on the configuring PC is
now on the HMI device.
See also
Overview (Page 146)
Data Transmission Options (Page 140)
Operating modes (Page 138)
Configuring the data channel (Page 115)
148
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Commissioning a project
7.6 Backup and restore
7.6.3
Backup and restore using ProSave
Requirements
● The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed
● The data channel is configured on the HMI device
Procedure for backup
Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, start ProSave on the PC.
2. Select the HMI device type in the "General" tab.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC.
Set the connection parameters.
4. Select the data to be backed up in the "Backup" tab.
5. Select a destination folder and a file name for the "*.psb" backup file.
6. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the HMI device automatically
sets "Transfer" mode when a backup is initiated.
7. Start the backup operation in ProSave with "Start Backup".
Follow the instructions in ProSave.
A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation.
Result
The system outputs a message when the backup is completed.
The relevant data is now backed up on the PC.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
149
Commissioning a project
7.6 Backup and restore
Procedure for restore
Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, start ProSave on the PC.
2. Select the HMI device type in the "General" tab.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC.
Set the connection parameters.
4. Select the "*.psb" backup file to be restored from the "Restore" tab.
You can see the HMI device for which the backup file was created and the type of backup
data the file contains.
5. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when a restore operation is initiated.
6. Start the restore operation in ProSave on the PC with "Start Restore".
Follow the instructions in ProSave.
A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation.
Result
When the restore is successfully completed, the data backed up on the PC is now on the
HMI device.
See also
Overview (Page 146)
Data Transmission Options (Page 140)
Operating modes (Page 138)
Configuring the data channel (Page 115)
150
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Commissioning a project
7.7 Updating the operating system
7.7
Updating the operating system
7.7.1
Overview
Updating the operating system
A compatibility conflict may occur when transferring a project to the HMI device. This is
caused by different versions of the configuration software used and the HMI device image
available on the HMI device. If there are different versions, the transfer is aborted. A
message indicating a compatibility conflict is displayed on the configuration PC.
There are two ways to match the versions:
● Update the HMI device image if the project was created with the most recent version of
the configuration software.
● Transfer a matching version of the HMI device image if you do not want to adapt the
project for the HMI device to the most recent version of the configuration software for the
project.
NOTICE
Data loss
All data on the HMI device, such as the project and licenses, will be deleted when you
update the operating system.
Note
When WinAC MP is used, all data channel parameters are reset.
Note
Calibrating the touch screen
After the update, you may have to recalibrate the touch screen.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
151
Commissioning a project
7.7 Updating the operating system
7.7.2
Resetting factory settings
In ProSave or WinCC flexible, you can update the operating system with or without resetting
to factory settings.
● Updating the operating system without resetting to factory settings
First, switch into "Transfer" mode on the HMI device or use the automatic transfer
function if the project is active. Then start the operating system update in ProSave or
WinCC flexible.
● Updating the operating system with resetting to factory settings
NOTICE
Loss of license keys
The license keys on the HMI device will be deleted when resetting to factory settings.
The license keys on the HMI device will be retained when updating the operating system
without resetting to factory settings.
NOTICE
Data channels
When resetting to factory settings, all data channel parameters are reset. The transfer
can only be started following reconfiguration of the data channels.
Note
You have to perform an operating system update with reset to factory settings if the HMI
device does not yet have an operating system or if the HMI device's operating system is
corrupt.
First, start the operating system update in ProSave or WinCC flexible and switch the
power on the HMI device off and on again when prompted.
7.7.3
Updating the Operating System using WinCC flexible
Requirement
● No project is open on the configuration PC in WinCC flexible.
● The HMI device is connected to this configuration PC.
● When updating the operating system without reset to factory state:
The data channel on the HMI device is configured.
152
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Commissioning a project
7.7 Updating the operating system
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. When updating the operating system with reset to factory state only:
Switch off power to the HMI device.
2. On the configuration PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
The "Communication Settings" dialog opens.
3. Select the type of HMI device.
4. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuration PC, then set
the connection parameters.
5. Close the dialog box with "OK".
6. Select the "OS Update" command from the "Project > Transfer" menu in WinCC flexible.
7. Select whether to update the operating system with or without restoring the factory state
by setting the "Reset to factory settings" check box accordingly.
8. Select the HMI device image file "*.img" under "Image path".
The HMI device image files are available under "WinCC flexible Images" in the
WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD.
The output area provides information on the version of the successfully opened HMI
device image file.
9. When updating without reset to the factory state only:
Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when an update is initiated.
10. In WinCC flexible, select "Update OS" on the configuration PC to run the operating
system update.
11. When updating with reset to the factory state only:
Switch on the power supply to the HMI device.
12. Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible.
A progress bar indicates the progress of the operating system update.
Result
A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed.
The HMI device no longer contains any project data.
See also
Overview (Page 155)
Configuring the data channel (Page 115)
Operating modes (Page 138)
Data Transmission Options (Page 140)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
153
Commissioning a project
7.7 Updating the operating system
7.7.4
Updating the Operating System using ProSave
Requirement
● The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed.
● When updating the operating system without reset to factory state only:
The data channel is configured on the HMI device.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. When updating the operating system with reset to factory state only:
Switch off power to the HMI device.
2. Go to the Windows Start menu and start ProSave on the PC.
3. Select the HMI device type in the "General" tab.
4. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC, then set the
connection parameters.
5. Select the "OS Update" tab.
6. Select whether to update the operating system with or without restoring the factory state
by setting the "Reset to factory settings" check box accordingly.
7. Select the HMI device image file "*.img" under "Image path".
The HMI device image files are available under "WinCC flexible Images" in the
WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD.
The output area provides information on the version of the successfully opened HMI
device image file.
8. When updating without reset to the factory state only:
Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when an update is initiated.
9. Select "Update OS" on the PC to run the operating system update.
10. When updating with reset to the factory state only:
Switch on the power supply to the HMI device.
11. Follow the instructions in ProSave.
A progress bar indicates the progress of the operating system update.
Result
A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed.
The HMI device no longer contains any project data.
154
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Commissioning a project
7.8 Installing and removing options
See also
Overview (Page 155)
Configuring the data channel (Page 115)
Operating modes (Page 138)
Data Transmission Options (Page 140)
7.8
Installing and removing options
7.8.1
Overview
Installing and removing options
You can install options on the HMI device, for example, additional programs developed
especially for the HMI device.
You can also remove the option from the HMI device again.
Note
License key
A license key may be needed to run an option. The license key unlocks the option for use.
7.8.2
Installing and removing options using WinCC flexible
Requirements
● The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC
● No project is open in WinCC flexible
● The data channel is configured on the HMI device
Procedure for installing an option
Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
The "Communication Settings" dialog opens.
2. Select the type of HMI device.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC, then set
the connection parameters.
4. Close the dialog with "OK".
5. Select the "Options" command in the menu "Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
155
Commissioning a project
7.8 Installing and removing options
6. Select the desired option under "Available options".
7. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when the installation of an option is initiated.
8. Start the installation of the option in WinCC flexible on the configuring PC with the ">>"
button.
Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible.
A status display appears indicating the progress of the installation.
Result
The option has now been installed on the HMI device.
Procedure for removing an option
Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
The "Communication Settings" dialog opens.
2. Select the type of HMI device.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC, then set
the connection parameters.
4. Close the dialog with "OK".
5. Select the "Options" command in the menu "Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
6. Select the desired option under "Installed options".
7. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when the removal of an option is initiated.
8. Start the removal of the option in WinCC flexible on the configuring PC with the "<<"
button.
Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible.
A status display appears indicating the progress of the removal.
Result
The option has now been removed on the HMI device.
See also
Operating modes (Page 138)
Overview (Page 155)
Configuring the data channel (Page 115)
Data Transmission Options (Page 140)
156
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Commissioning a project
7.8 Installing and removing options
7.8.3
Installing and removing options using ProSave
Requirements
● The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed
● The data channel is configured on the HMI device
Procedure for installing an option
Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, start ProSave on the PC.
2. Select the HMI device type in the "General" tab.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC.
4. Set the connection parameters.
5. Select the "Options" tab.
6. Select the desired option under "Available options".
7. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when the installation of an option is initiated.
8. Start the installation of the option in ProSave with the ">>" button.
9. Follow the instructions in ProSave.
A status display appears indicating the progress of the installation.
Result
The option has now been installed on the HMI device.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
157
Commissioning a project
7.9 Transferring and transferring back license keys
Procedure for removing an option
Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, start ProSave on the PC.
2. Select the HMI device type in the "General" tab.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC.
4. Set the connection parameters.
5. Select the "Options" tab.
6. Press the "Device status" button to update the display.
7. Select the desired option under "Installed options".
8. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when the removal of an option is initiated.
9. Start the removal of the option in ProSave with the "<<" button.
Follow the instructions in ProSave.
A status display appears indicating the progress of the removal.
Result
The option has now been removed on the HMI device.
See also
Overview (Page 155)
Configuring the data channel (Page 115)
Operating modes (Page 138)
Data Transmission Options (Page 140)
7.9
Transferring and transferring back license keys
7.9.1
Overview
With the purchase of an add-on package, you obtain a specific user license with an
associated license key. Once you have installed an add-on, transfer a license key to the HMI
device. The license key unlocks an add-on for use.
You can also transfer back the license key from the HMI device to a license diskette.
Note
License keys can only be transferred and transferred back with the Automation License
Manager or WinCC flexible.
158
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Commissioning a project
7.9 Transferring and transferring back license keys
7.9.2
Transferring and transferring back license keys
Requirements
● The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC
● When transferring or transferring back using WinCC flexible:
No project is open in WinCC flexible
● The data channel is configured on the HMI device
● The license diskette with the license key to be transferred must be inserted in the floppy
drive of the configuring PC
Procedure for transferring a license key
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch to "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
2. When transferring using WinCC flexible:
Select the "License Keys" command in the menu "Project > Transfer". The
Automation License Manager opens.
When transferring using the Automation License Manager:
Start the Automation License Manager via the Windows Start menu.
3. In the Automation License Manager, select the command "Connect HMI device" in the
menu "Edit > Connect target system".
The "Connect Target System" dialog opens.
4. Under "Device Type", select the appropriate HMI device type.
5. Select the type of connection in the "Connection" field and set the connection parameters.
6. Select "OK".
The connection to the HMI device is established. The connected HMI device is displayed
in the left window of the Automation License Manager.
7. In the left window, select the source drive.
The right window displays the available license keys.
8. Drag one or more license keys from the right window and drop them on the HMI device in
the left window.
The license keys are then transferred to the HMI device.
Result
The license key has now been transferred from the license diskette to the HMI device.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
159
Commissioning a project
7.9 Transferring and transferring back license keys
Procedure for transferring a license key back
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch to "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
2. When transferring back using WinCC flexible:
Select the "License Keys" command in the menu "Project > Transfer". The
Automation License Manager opens.
When transferring back using the Automation License Manager:
Start the Automation License Manager via the Windows Start menu.
3. In the Automation License Manager, select the command "Connect HMI device" in the
menu "Edit > Connect target system".
The "Connect Target System" dialog opens.
4. Under "Device Type", select the appropriate HMI device type.
5. Select the type of connection in the "Connection" field and set the connection parameters.
6. Select "OK".
The connection to the HMI device is established. The connected HMI device is displayed
in the left window of the Automation License Manager.
7. In the left window, select the HMI device.
The right window displays the available license keys.
8. Drag one or more license keys from the right window and drop them on the HMI device in
the left window.
The license keys are then transferred back to the license diskette.
Result
The license key has now been transferred back from the HMI device to the license diskette.
See also
Overview (Page 155)
Configuring the data channel (Page 115)
Operating modes (Page 138)
Data Transmission Options (Page 140)
160
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.1
8
Overview
Configuration and process control phase
HMI devices can be used to operate and monitor tasks in process and production
automation. The plant screens on the HMI devices are used to provide a clear overview of
the active processes.
The HMI device project, which includes the plant screens, is created during the configuration
phase. The configuration engineer defines which tasks the HMI device has in the process
and defines the following in detail:
● Which process data is displayed on the individual HMI device
● Which plant components are controlled by this HMI device
The configuration engineer stores this information in the project's screens. The project is
transferred to the HMI device during commissioning.
After transfer to the HMI device, current processes can be operated and monitored in the
project's screens. The screens enable you to observe, for example, operational states,
current process data and faults in a plant. Operating elements which are used to operate the
process, for example buttons, I/O fields and alarm windows, are displayed in the screens.
Operator control options
The hardware of the HMI device determines which of the following operator control options
are available:
● Touch screen
The operating elements shown in the dialogs are touch-sensitive. Touch objects are
basically operated in the same way as mechanical keys. You activate operating elements
by touching them with your finger. To double-click them, touch an operating element
twice in succession.
● HMI device keyboard
The operating elements shown in the screens are selected and operated using the keys
of the HMI device.
● External keyboard, connected via USB
● External mouse, connected via USB
CAUTION
Do not use any pointed or sharp objects when operating the touch screen. Otherwise
this may damage the plastic membrane of the touch screen.
The following provides instructions for operating a project with the touch screen and the
keyboard.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
161
Operating a project
8.1 Overview
Operating a project with an external keyboard
An external keyboard can be used to operate a project in exactly the same way as with the
HMI keyboard or screen keyboard.
Note
The function keys of the external keyboard are disabled.
Use the other keys of the external keyboard, which correspond to the HMI device keys in the
description.
Operating a project with an external mouse
An external mouse can be used to operate a project in exactly the same way as with the HMI
touch screen. Click the described operating elements with the mouse.
Unintentional actions
CAUTION
Do not carry out several operations simultaneously. You may otherwise trigger
unintentional actions.
• With touch control:
Always touch only one operating element on the screen
• With key control:
Do not press more than two keys simultaneously
Observing the plant documentation
Some operations with the project may require in-depth knowledge about the specific plant on
the part of the operator. Proceed with caution, for example, when you use jog mode. Further
information on this may be available in your plant documentation
Operation feedback from operating elements
The HMI device provides operation feedback as soon as it detects that an operating element
has been selected. This operation feedback is independent of any communication with the
PLC. Therefore, this operation feedback does not indicate whether the relevant action is
actually executed or not.
Optical feedback from operating elements
The operating element receives the focus and is selected. The configuration engineer can
also configure the selection of an operating element so that it deviates from the standard.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation
162
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.1 Overview
The type of optical feedback depends on the operating element:
● Buttons
The HMI device outputs different views of the "Pressed" and "Unpressed" states,
provided the configuration engineer has configured a 3D effect:
– "Pressed" state:
– "Unpressed" state:
The configuration engineer determines the appearance of a selected field, for example,
line width and color for the focus.
● Invisible buttons
By default, invisible buttons are not displayed as pressed when they are touched. No
optical feedback is provided in this case.
The configuration engineer may, however, configure invisible buttons so that their outline
appears as lines when touched. This outline remains visible until you select another
operating element.
● I/O fields
When you select an I/O field, the content of the I/O field is displayed against a colored
background. With touch operation, a screen keyboard is displayed for the entering of
values.
Acoustic feedback from operating elements
As soon as the HMI device detects a touch of the touch screen or that a key has been
pressed, an acoustic signal is issued. You can activate or deactivate this acoustic operation
feedback.
Note
The acoustic feedback is only possible if you interact with the project directly on the touch
screen or press one of the keys of the HMI device. If you use an external mouse or keyboard
for interaction, no acoustic signal is issued.
Acoustic signal for inadvertent operations
If you try to enter an invalid character, the HMI device issues an acoustic signal in
accordance with the setting.
See also
Set the volume (Page 103)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
163
Operating a project
8.2 Direct keys
8.2
Direct keys
Introduction
Direct keys on the HMI device are used to set bits in the I/O area of a SIMATIC S7.
Direct keys enable operations with short reaction times that are, for example, a jog mode
requirement.
NOTICE
Direct keys are still active when the HMI device is in "offline" mode.
NOTICE
If you operate a function key with direct key functionality in a running project, the direct key
function is always executed, independent of the current screen contents.
Note
You can only use direct keys when there is a connection via PROFIBUS DP or
PROFINET IO.
Direct keys result in additional basic load on the HMI device.
Direct keys
The following objects can be configured as a direct key:
● Buttons
● Function keys
You can also define image numbers in the case of HMI devices with touch operation. In this
way, the project engineer can configure the direct keys on an image-specific basis.
Further information on configuring direct keys can be found in the
"WinCC flexible Communication" system manual.
See also
Bit assignment of the direct keys (Page 258)
Enabling PROFINET IO (Page 117)
164
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.3 Setting the project language
8.3
Setting the project language
Introduction
The HMI device supports multilingual projects. You must have configured a corresponding
operating element which lets you change the language setting on the HMI device during
runtime.
The project always starts with the language set in the previous session.
Requirements
● The required language for the project must be available on the HMI device
● The language switching function must be logically linked to a configured operating
element such as a button
Selecting a language
You can change project languages at any time. Language-specific objects are immediately
output to the screen in the new language when you switch languages.
The following options are available for switching the language:
● A configured operating element switches from one language to the next in a list
● A configured operating element directly sets the desired language
Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this
subject is available there.
See also
Changing Regional Settings (Page 97)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
165
Operating a project
8.4 Entering values using the touch screen
8.4
Entering values using the touch screen
8.4.1
Overview
Screen keyboard
When you touch an operating element requiring entry on the HMI device touch screen, a
screen keyboard appears. The screen keyboard is displayed in the following cases:
● An I/O field is selected for input
● A password must be entered for accessing a password-protected function
The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete.
Based on the configuration of the operating element, the system displays different screen
keyboards for entering numerical or alphanumerical values.
Note
The screen keyboard display is independent of the configured project language.
General procedure
The operating elements of a screen are operated by touching the touch screen.
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired operating element within the screen.
2. Depending on the operating element, perform further actions. Detailed descriptions can
be found under the respective operating element.
Examples:
– I/O field: Enter numerical, alphanumerical or symbolic values in the I/O field
– Symbolic I/O field: Select an entry from the drop down list box
– Slider control: Move the slider control
166
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.4 Entering values using the touch screen
Procedure for text boxes
Values are entered in the project text boxes. Based on your configuration, the values are
saved to tags and transferred, for example, to the PLC.
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired text box within the screen.
The screen keyboard opens.
Depending on your configuration, you can enter values in the text box in the following
manner:
– Numerical values, for example decimal numbers, hexadecimal numbers, binary values
– Alphanumerical values, for example digits and letters
– Date/time
2. Enter the value.
3. Confirm your entry with
8.4.2
or discard your entry with the button
.
Entering and Editing Numerical Values
Numerical screen keyboard
When you touch an operator control for numerical input on the HMI-device touch screen, the
numerical screen keyboard appears. This is the case, for example, for a text box. The screen
keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete.
Note
Opened screen keyboard
When the screen keyboard is open, PLC job 51, "Select screen" has no function.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
167
Operating a project
8.4 Entering values using the touch screen
Formats for numerical values
You can enter values in numerical text boxes based on the following formats:
● Decimal
● Binary
● Hexadecimal
Note
Entry of hexadecimal values
When you enter values in hexadecimal format, the alphanumerical screen keyboard
opens.
Limit test of numerical values
Tags can be assigned limits. If you enter a value that lies outside of this limit, it will not be
accepted, for example, 80 with a limit of 78. In this case the HMI device will deliver a system
alarm, if an alarm window is configured. The original value is displayed again.
Decimal places for numerical values
The configuration engineer can define the number of decimal places for a numerical text box.
The number of decimal places is checked when you enter a value in this type of I/O field.
● Decimal places in excess of the limit are ignored.
● Empty decimal places are filled with "0".
168
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.4 Entering values using the touch screen
Procedure
Numerical values can be entered character-by-character via the buttons on the numerical
screen keyboard.
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired operator control within the screen.
The numerical screen keyboard opens. The existing value is displayed in the screen
keyboard and is selected.
2. Enter the value.
The keys with for example the letters G to Z are available to enter a hexadecimal value;
however, the characters are not entered. Depending on the settings, the HMI device
outputs an audible signal.
You have the following options to enter a value:
– The selected value is deleted when you enter the first character. Completely reenter
the value.
and
– Use the
keys to move the cursor within the current value. You can
now edit the characters of the current value or add characters.
key to delete the character to the left of the cursor. If the value is
Use the
selected, use this key to delete the selected part of the value.
The
key deletes the character positioned to the right of the cursor. If the value is
selected, use this key to delete the selected part of the value.
key to display the info text of the I/O field.
– Use the
This key is only enabled if info text has been configured for the input object or the
current screen.
3. Use the
key to confirm your entry or cancel it with
. Either action closes the
screen keyboard.
Result
You have changed the numerical value or entered a new one.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
169
Operating a project
8.4 Entering values using the touch screen
8.4.3
Entering and editing alphanumerical values
Alphanumerical screen keyboard
When you touch an operator control for alphanumerical input on the HMI-device touch
screen, the alphanumerical screen keyboard appears. This is the case, for example, for a
text box. The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete.
Note
Opened screen keyboard
When the screen keyboard is open, PLC job 51, "Select screen" has no function.
Language switching
Language switching in the project has no influence on the alphanumerical screen keyboard.
The entry of Cyrillic or Asian characters is therefore not possible.
Keyboard levels
The alphanumerical screen keyboard has various levels.
● Normal level
● Shift level
If you change the levels with key
170
, the key assignments change.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.4 Entering values using the touch screen
Procedure
Alphanumerical values can be entered character-by-character via the buttons on the
alphanumerical screen keyboard.
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired operator control within the screen.
The alphanumerical screen keyboard opens. The existing value is displayed in the screen
keyboard and is selected.
2. Enter the value.
You have the following options to enter a value:
– The selected value is deleted when you enter the first character. Completely reenter
the value.
and
– Use the
keys to move the cursor within the current value. You can
now edit the characters of the current value or add characters.
key to delete the character to the left of the cursor. If the value is
Use the
selected, use this key to delete the selected part of the value.
The
key deletes the character positioned to the right of the cursor. If the value is
selected, use this key to delete the selected part of the value.
it is possible to switch between the keyboard levels of the screen
– Using key
keyboard. On switchover, the key assignments of the screen keyboard change.
key to display the info text of the I/O field.
– Use the
This key is only enabled if info text has been configured for the input object or the
current screen.
3. Use the
key to confirm your entry or cancel it with
. Either action closes the
screen keyboard.
Result
You have changed the alphanumeric value or entered a new one.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
171
Operating a project
8.4 Entering values using the touch screen
8.4.4
Entering the date and time
Entering the date and time
Enter the date and time in the same way you enter alphanumerical values.
Note
When entering the date and time, please note that the format is determined by the
configured project language.
See also
Entering and Editing Numerical Values (Page 167)
Entering and editing alphanumerical values (Page 170)
8.4.5
Entering Symbolic Values
Selection list
Operator control for entering symbolic values offer you a list from which you can select the
input values. When you touch a symbolic I/O field on the HMI device touch screen, the
following selection list opens.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the required operator control.
The selection list of the operator control opens. Select
and
to scroll in the selection
list.
2. Touch the required entry in the selection list.
The selected entry is accepted as an entry.
Result
You have changed the symbolic value or entered a new one.
172
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.4 Entering values using the touch screen
8.4.6
Displaying Infotext
Purpose
The configuration engineer uses info text to provide additional information and operating
instructions. The configuration engineer can configure info text on screens and operator
controls.
The infotext of an I/O field can contain, for example, information on the value to be entered.
Opening info text for operator controls
1. Touch the required operator control.
The screen keyboard opens. You can see from the appearance of the
key
whether info text has been configured for the operator control or the current screen.
2. Touch the
key on the screen keyboard.
The info text for the operator control is displayed. If there is no info text for the selected
screen object, the info text for the current screen is displayed, if it has been configured.
You can scroll through the contents of long info text with
and
.
Note
Switching between displayed info text
The configuration engineer can configure infotext for an I/O field and the associated
screen. You can switch between two info texts by touching the info text window.
3. Close the displayed info text by pressing
.
Alternative procedure
Depending on your configuration, info text can also be called via a configured operator
control.
Refer to your plant documentation to find any available additional information on this topic.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
173
Operating a project
8.5 Entering values using the keys
8.5
Entering values using the keys
8.5.1
Control keys
Introduction
The following tables show the control keys with which you operate the project. You will also
find detailed descriptions under the individual operating elements.
Select operating elements
Key
Functions
Description
TAB
Tabulator
Selects the next/previous operating element in the tab
sequence.
Cursor keys
Selects the next operating element to the left, right, above
or below the current screen object.
SHIFT
+
TAB
Navigates in the operating element.
Using operating elements
Key
SHIFT
+
SHIFT
+
SHIFT
+
SHIFT
+
Functions
Description
Position the cursor
Positions the cursor within an operating element, e.g. in
the I/O field.
Scroll back
Scrolls back a page in a list.
Scroll to the beginning
Scrolls to the beginning of a list.
Scroll forward
Scrolls one page forward in a list.
Scroll to the end
Scrolls to the end of a list.
Enter key
•
•
•
•
HOME
FN
+
HOME
END
FN
ENTER
+
END
Operates buttons.
Accepts and ends an entry.
Opens a drop down list box.
Toggles within a text box between character mode
and normal mode.
In character mode, a single character is selected. In
this mode, you can advance in the character set
using the cursor keys.
174
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.5 Entering values using the keys
Key
ESC
Functions
Description
Cancel
•
•
INS
DEL
ALT
+
CTRL
+
ENTER
Deletes the characters of a value entry and restores
the original value.
Closes the active dialog.
Delete characters
Deletes the character to the right of the current cursor
position.
Delete characters
Deletes the character to the left of the current cursor
position.
Open drop down list box
Opens a drop down list box.
Accept value
Accepts the selected value in the drop down list box
without closing the list.
Functions
Purpose
Toggle key assignment
Switches over key assignment of keys with multiple
assignment.
• No LED is illuminated:
Enter key combinations
Key
A-Z
•
The number assignment is enabled. Pressing the
button once toggles to letter assignment.
An LED is lit:
The left or right letter assignment is enabled.
Each time the key is pressed, the system toggles
between the left letter assignment, the right letter
assignment and the number assignment.
SHIFT
Toggle between uppercase and lower-case
Used in key combinations, for example for entering
upper-case letters.
FN
Switch to additional key
assignment
Some of the keys contain a blue imprinted key
assignment , for example the "%" character.
CTRL
General control function
Used in key combinations
ALT
General control function
Used in key combinations
Used in key combinations for the blue key assignment.
Acknowledge alarms
Key
ACK
Functions
Description
Acknowledge
Acknowledges the currently displayed fault alarm or all
the alarms of an alarm group as group acknowledgment.
The LED lights up as long as unacknowledged fault
alarms are active.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
175
Operating a project
8.5 Entering values using the keys
Displaying infotext
Key
HELP
Functions
Description
Displaying infotext
Opens a window with the configured infotext at the
selected object, e.g. alarm or I/O field. If an infotext
exists for the selected object, the LED lights up.
Multi-key operation
Unwanted actions may be triggered, if the operator unintentionally actuates a key
combination.
CAUTION
Unintentional actions
In "Online" mode, simultaneous operation of more than two keys may cause unintentional
actions in the plant.
Never press more than two keys simultaneously.
8.5.2
Example: Enter characters using the alphanumeric keyboard
Using the same keys of the alphanumeric keyboard you can enter up to six different
characters. The entry result depends on the combination of the keys pressed.
The values "5", "M", "m", "N", "n" and "%" are entered using the same key
keyboard. You can use the keys
A-Z
,
SHIFT
and
FN
M
%
N
5
of the
to switch between the different
assignments..
The following table shows the entry options using the key
Key
176
A-Z
Key
SHIFT
Key
M
%
N
5
FN
.
Result
No LED is lit
Not relevant
Not pressed
5
Left LED is illuminated.
Not pressed
Not pressed
m
Left LED is illuminated.
Pressed
Not pressed
M
Right LED is illuminated.
Not pressed
Not pressed
n
Right LED is illuminated.
Pressed
Not pressed
N
Not relevant
Not relevant
Pressed
%
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.5 Entering values using the keys
8.5.3
Function keys
Function keys
Function key assignment is defined during configuration. The configuration engineer can
assign function keys globally and locally.
Function keys with global function assignment
A globally assigned function key always triggers the same action on the HMI device or in the
PLC irrespective of the screen displayed. Such an action could be, for example, the
activation of a screen or the closure of an alarm window.
Function keys with local function assignment
A function key with local function assignment is screen-specific and is therefore only
effective within the active screen.
The function assigned locally to a function key can vary from screen to screen.
The function key of a screen can be assigned one function only, either a global or local one.
The local assignment function takes priority over the global setting.
The configuration engineer can assign function keys in such a way that you can operate
operating elements with function keys, for example, the alarm view, trend view, recipe view
or status / force.
8.5.4
General procedures
Introduction
The control keys and function keys of the HMI device are available for key control
General procedure
The operating elements of a screen are operated using the control keys of the HMI device.
Proceed as follows:
1. Continue to press the key
TAB
or the cursor keys until the required operating element is
selected on the screen.
2. Depending on the operating element, perform further actions. Detailed descriptions can
be found under the respective operating element.
Examples:
– I/O field: Enter numerical, alphanumeric or symbolic values in the I/O field
– Slider control: Move the slider control
3. Confirm the operation with the key
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
ENTER
or abort the operation with the key
ESC
.
177
Operating a project
8.5 Entering values using the keys
8.5.5
Entering and editing numerical values
Formats for numerical values
You can enter values in numerical text boxes based on the following formats:
● Decimal
● Hexadecimal
● Binary
Limit value test of numerical values
Tags can be assigned limit values. If you enter a value that lies outside of this limit, it will not
be accepted, for example, 80 with a limit value of 78. In this case the HMI device will deliver
a system alarm, if an alarm window is configured. The original value is displayed again.
Procedure
Numerical and alphanumerical values can be entered in character mode using the system
keys.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the desired text box within the screen with
TAB
.
The existing value is selected in the text box.
2. Enter the value using the numerical keypad.
You have the following options to enter a value:
– The existing value is deleted when you enter the first character. Completely reenter
the value.
– Press
SHIFT
and a cursor key simultaneously. The selection of the field content is
canceled. Move the cursor in the existing value. You can now edit the characters of
the current value or add characters.
The
INS
DEL
key deletes the character positioned to the right of the cursor. Use the
key to delete the character to the left of the cursor.
To enter the hexadecimal characters "A" to "F", switch the numerical keypad to letter
assignment using the key
– If the LED of the
HELP
A-Z
.
key is lit, infotext is available for the selected object or the
current screen.
Use the key
3. Select
178
ENTER
HELP
to display the infotext for the operating element or current screen.
to confirm your entry.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.5 Entering values using the keys
Result
You have changed the numerical value or entered a new one.
8.5.6
Entering and editing alphanumerical values
Procedure
Alphanumerical values can be entered in character mode using the system keys.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the desired text box within the screen with
TAB
.
The existing value is selected in the text box.
2. Enter the value using the system keys.
You have the following options to enter a value:
– The existing value is deleted when you enter the first character. Completely reenter
the value.
– Press
SHIFT
and a cursor key simultaneously. The selection of the field content is
canceled. Move the cursor in the existing value. You can now edit the characters of
the current value or add characters.
The
INS
DEL
key deletes the character positioned to the right of the cursor. Use the
key to delete the character to the left of the cursor.
To enter letters, switch the numerical keypad to letter assignment using the key
– If the LED of the
current screen.
Use the key
3. Select
ENTER
HELP
HELP
A-Z
.
key is lit, infotext is available for the selected object or the
to display the infotext for the operating element or current screen.
to confirm your entry.
Result
You have changed the alphanumeric value or entered a new one.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
179
Operating a project
8.5 Entering values using the keys
8.5.7
Entering the date and time
Entering the date and time
Enter the date and time in the same way you enter alphanumerical values.
Note
When entering the date and time, please note that the format is determined by the
configured project language.
See also
Entering and editing numerical values (Page 178)
Entering and editing alphanumerical values (Page 179)
8.5.8
Entering Symbolic Values
Selection list
When you select a symbolic IO field, a selection list opens.
Procedure
Symbolic values are selected from the entries of a selection list.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the desired symbolic text box within the screen with
2. Open the selection list using the
ENTER
ENTER
.
key. The selection list opens.
3. Select the required entry using the cursor keys
4. Confirm your entry with the
TAB
,
or
.
key.
Result
You have changed the symbolic value or entered a new one.
180
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.5 Entering values using the keys
8.5.9
Displaying Infotext
Purpose
The configuration engineer uses info text to provide additional information and operating
instructions. The configuration engineer can configure info text on screens and operator
controls.
The infotext of an I/O field can contain, for example, information on the value to be entered.
If the LED of the
HELP
key lights up, an infotext has been configured for the selected display
object or for the current screen.
Procedure
1. Press
HELP
.
The info text for the selected screen object is displayed. If there is no info text for the
selected screen object, the info text for the current screen is displayed, if it has been
configured.
You can scroll through the contents of long info texts using the cursor keys
and
.
Note
Switching between displayed info text
The configuration engineer can configure infotext for an I/O field and the associated
screen. You can switch between two infotexts by pressing the
2. Close the infotext by pressing the
ESC
ENTER
key.
key.
Alternative procedure
Depending on your configuration, info text can also be called via a function key or via an
existing operator control.
Refer to your plant documentation to find any available additional information on this topic.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
181
Operating a project
8.6 Bar and gauge
8.6
Bar and gauge
Bar
The bar is a dynamic display object. The bar displays a value from the PLC as a rectangular
area. The bar allows you to recognize the following at a glance:
● The distance of the current value from the configured limit values
● Whether a set point value has been reached
The bar can display values such as fill levels or batch counts.
Layout
The layout of the bar depends on the configuration:
● The bar may feature a scale of values
● The configured limit values can be indicated by lines
● Color changes can signal when a limit value has been exceeded or has not been reached
Gauge
The gauge is a dynamic display object. The gauge displays numerical values in analog form
by means of a pointer. This enables an operator at the HMI device to see at a glance if the
boiler pressure is in the normal range, for example.
Layout
The layout of the gauge depends on the configuration:
● A trailing pointer can display the maximum value reached so far on the scale. The trailing
pointer is reset when the screen is reloaded
● The label on the scale can show the measured variable, for example boiler pressure and
the physical unit, for example bar
Operation
The bar and the gauge are for display only. Both objects cannot be controlled by the
operator.
182
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.7 Operating the switch
8.7
Operating the switch
Introduction
The switch is an operating element and display object with two predefined switching states,
for example "On" and "Off". Switches can signalize the state of a plant section, for example if
a motor is running or not. At the same time, you can use the switch to change the state of
the corresponding plant section via the HMI device, for example from "On" to "Off".
Layout
The layout of the switch depends on the configuration:
● Switch with slider
The two states are displayed by the position of the slider
①
Slider
● Switch with text or graphic
The two states are displayed by the label on the slider
Depending on the switching state, the switch is labeled with one of two texts or one of two
graphics.
Examples:
"Backward" or "Forward"
or
Procedure using the touch screen
● Switch with slider
Proceed as follows:
Move the slider to the other position or double-click the slider area
● Switch with text or graphic
Proceed as follows:
Touch the switch
Procedure using the keys
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the desired switch within the screen with
2. Press
ENTER
TAB
.
.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
183
Operating a project
8.8 Operating the Slider Control
Result
The switch changes its appearance. The associated value is switched.
8.8
Operating the Slider Control
Introduction
The slider control can be used to monitor and change process values within a defined range.
The slider control can also be configured without a slider. In this case, you cannot enter a
value. The slider control is then only used for displaying values.
①
Slider control for entering values
②
Value display with current value
Layout
The layout of the slider control depends on the configuration:
● The slider control can contain a label and a setting range
● The current value can be displayed below the area of the slider control
Procedure using the touch screen
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the slider of the desired slider control.
2. Move the slider to the required value.
If a value display has been configured, you can check the exact value that has been set.
3. Release the slider.
184
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.8 Operating the Slider Control
Key control
The following table shows the control keys used to set the slide to a desired value:
Key combination
Description
SHIFT
+
or
SHIFT
+
SHIFT
+
or
SHIFT
+
Increase value by 1
Reduce value by 1
Increase value in 5% increments.
HOME
Decrease value in 5% increments.
END
Set maximum value
FN
+
HOME
FN
+
END
Set minimum value
Procedure using the keys
Proceed as follows:
1. Use the
TAB
key to select the desired slider control within the screen.
2. Move the slider to the required value.
If a value display has been configured, you can check the exact value that has been set.
Result
The set value is applied.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
185
Operating a project
8.9 Operating the Trend View
8.9
Operating the Trend View
Trends
Trends continuously display the current process data or process data from a log.
Trend view
Trends are displayed in the trend view. A trend view can display several trends
simultaneously.
7UHQG
7DJDVVLJQPHQW
3UHVVXUH
3UHVVXUHSDWWHUQ
9DOXH
'DWHWLPH
①
Ruler
②
Buttons for trend operation
③
Trend value in the value table
Layout and operation
The layout and operation of the trend view depends on the configuration. The configuration
engineer determines the following, for example:
● Appearance of the trend view, the axes, value ranges and labels
● Operating options of the trend view
● Limits for the trend values
● The change of color of the trend in the event of limit violation
Refer to your plant documentation to find any available additional information on this topic.
Value table
The trend values can be read from the value table if this is configured:
● When the ruler is displayed, the trend values are shown at a position of the ruler in the
value table
● When the ruler is hidden, the latest trend values are displayed in the value table
186
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.9 Operating the Trend View
Ruler
When configured, a ruler is available to provide an exact reading of the trend values in the
value table.
You can move the ruler to the desired position of the trend view.
Operation
The trend view can be operated as follows:
● Enlarge or reduce the time interval displayed
● Scroll forward or back by one display width
● Stop and resume trend recording
● Move the ruler
● Hide and display the ruler
The following table shows the trend view buttons:
Button
Key combination
Function
Stops or continues trend recording.
Y
Enlarges the displayed time section.
Z
CTRL
+ +
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
SHIFT
+
CTRL
+
ENTER
CTRL
+
ALT
+
CTRL
+
ALT
+
Reduces the displayed time section.
Scrolls one display width backward (to the left).
Scrolls one display width forward (to the right).
Scrolls back to the beginning of the trend recording. The
start values of the trend recording are displayed there.
Moves the ruler backward (to the left).
Moves the ruler forward (to the right).
Shows or hides the ruler.
In addition, the configuration engineer can configure function keys or operator controls with
which you can control trend views.
Refer to your plant documentation to find any available additional information on this topic.
Touch operation
Touch the required button in the trend view.
The position of the ruler can also be changed by means of touching and dragging the ruler
on the touch screen.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
187
Operating a project
8.10 Operating the status force
Procedure using the keys
Proceed as follows:
1. Use the
TAB
key to select the desired button within the trend view.
2. Confirm your entry by pressing the
8.10
Operating the status force
8.10.1
Overview
ENTER
key.
Application
You read or write access values of the connected PLC directly with status force. Status force
allows you to monitor or change addresses of the PLC program, etc. You don't need to
connect an additional programming device or additional PC to the PLC.
Note
Status force can only be used in combination with SIMATIC S5 or SIMATIC S7.
Layout
The layout of status force depends on the configuration.
The figure shows the general layout of status force. A value can be monitored or controlled
on every line.
The following figure shows an example of Status Force.
The configuration engineer specifies which columns appear in status force.
188
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.10 Operating the status force
The table shows the significance of all configurable columns.
Column
Functions
"Connection"
The PLC whose address ranges must be displayed.
"Type", "DB Number", "Offset", "Bit"
The address range of the value
"Data Type", "Format"
The data type of the value
"Status Value"
The value read from the specified address.
"Control Value"
The value to be written to the specified address.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation
Operating elements
Depending on your configuration, you can operate the Status Force using the following
buttons:
Buttons
Functions
"Read" button
Updates the display in the "Status Value" column.
This button engages when it is pressed. You cannot operate any text boxes until
the button is actuated again and the refresh is stopped.
"Write" button
Applies the new value in the "Control Value" column. The control value is written
to the PLC.
8.10.2
Touch operation
Operator input options
Status Force can be operated as follows:
● Change the column sequence
● Read the status values of the connected PLC
● Enter values and transfer them to the PLC
Change column sequence
Depending on the configuration, you can change the column sequence of Status Force.
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the column header which you wish to exchange with a different column header
2. Keeping the touch screen pressed, move the column heading to the column heading you
wish to exchange it with
Result
The columns are displayed in the modified sequence.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
189
Operating a project
8.10 Operating the status force
Procedure for reading the status value
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the address and the desired format of a value for each line. Touch the respective
columns to display the screen keyboard.
2. Once you have entered all of the desired values, touch the
button.
Result
All values are read cyclically by the PLC and entered in the "Status value" column until the
button is touched again.
Requirements for forcing
The following requirements must be fulfilled in order to force values:
● The "Control value" column must be available
● The "Write" button must be available
Procedure for forcing a value
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the address of a value for each line. Enter the desired value in the "Control value"
column. Touch the respective columns to display the screen keyboard.
2. Once you have entered all of the desired values, touch the
button.
Result
The values from the "Control value" column are transferred once to the PLC.
190
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.10 Operating the status force
8.10.3
Key control
Operator control options
Status force can be operated as follows:
● Change the column width.
● Read the status values of the connected PLC
● Enter values and transfer them to the PLC
Key control
The following table lists the key combinations for operating the status force:
Keys
Functions
{
CTRL
+
CTRL
+
CTRL
+
CTRL
+
CTRL
+
CTRL
+
CTRL
+
Operates the "Read" button.
}
Operates the "Write" button.
ENTER
Selects the first/last field in the current line.
Selects the first/last field in the current column.
Deletes the current line.
INS
DEL
Otherwise:
Do not select a PLC in the "Connection" column.
Opens selection box.
ENTER
CTRL
+
ALT
+
CTRL
+
ALT
+
CTRL
+ +
Y
Z
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Increases the width of the current column.
Decreases the width of the current column.
Optimizes column width.
191
Operating a project
8.10 Operating the status force
Procedure for reading the status value
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the address and format of the status value for each status value you wish to read in
one line. Select the respective fields and enter the values using the keyboard.
{
2. Press
CTRL
}
+
.
Result
All status values are read cyclically from the PLC and entered in the "Status Value" column
until the
CTRL
+
{
}
keys are pressed again.
Requirements for forcing
The following requirements must be fulfilled in order to force values:
● The "Control Value" column must be available
● The "Write" button must be available
Procedure for forcing a value
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the address of a value for each line. Enter the desired control value in the "Control
Value" column. Select the respective fields and enter the values using the keyboard.
2. Once you have entered all of the desired control values, press the
CTRL
+
ENTER
key.
Result
The values from the "Control Value" column are transferred once to the PLC.
Alternative procedure
Alternatively, you can also select the buttons
and operate it using key
192
ENTER
and
using the key
TAB
.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.11 Operating the [email protected] view
8.11
Operating the [email protected] view
8.11.1
Overview
Application
The [email protected] view enables you to monitor and remotely operate the current project of a
remote HMI device. With the correct configuration, several equal priority HMI devices can
access a remote HMI device.
Note
If another HMI device accesses your HMI device via the [email protected] view, this leads to an
additional load on your HMI device.
Layout
In the [email protected] view, the remote HMI is displayed with the complete layout.
Depending on the configuration, you can monitor and also operate this screen.
You can also operate the function keys like buttons on an HMI device with a touch screen.
Monitoring mode
On a [email protected] view which is configured for monitoring mode, you can only monitor the
remote HMI device. You cannot control its operation.
Operation
Note
It is not possible to operate the direct keys of the remote HMI device from the local HMI
device.
The available operator controls depend on the HMI devices used:
● Same type of HMI devices
You can operate the project of the remote HMI device with the operator controls of your
HMI device
● Operate keys from a local touch screen
All the keys of the remote HMI device are displayed as buttons on the touch screen. You
can touch them to operate them.
● Touch operation from a local HMI device using keys
You operate the buttons in the usual manner.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
193
Operating a project
8.11 Operating the [email protected] view
8.11.2
Touch operation
Operator input options
The [email protected] view can be operated as follows:
● Starting remote control
● Forcing permission
● Ending remote control
Procedure for starting remote control
Proceed as follows:
1. On the HMI device change to the screen with the [email protected] view.
The following options are available for establishing the connection to the remote HMI
device:
– The connection is established automatically.
– The connection must be established by touching the appropriate button.
Depending on the configuration, you may be required to enter the address of the
remote HMI device and a password.
2. The current screen of the project running on the remote device is displayed on the screen
of your HMI device.
3. You can now monitor or control this screen depending on your configuration.
Scroll bars are displayed if the screen of the remote HMI device is larger than that of the
current HMI device.
Procedure for forcing permission
If several HMI devices have access to a HMI device, only one HMI device has operating
permission at any one time.
Two cases must be distinguished for this case:
● If another HMI device is already controlling the remote HMI device, if configured
accordingly, you can force operating permission for the remote HMI device
– You are trying to operate the remote HMI device
– A dialog appears in which you are prompted to enter the appropriate password for
forcing remote control
– You are now authorized to operate the remote HMI device
● If another HMI device is accessing your HMI device via the [email protected] view, you can
force local operating permission for your HMI device
– Touch the screen of your HMI device five times consecutively
– You are given permission to operate your local HMI device
194
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.11 Operating the [email protected] view
Procedure for ending remote control
You can end monitoring and control of a remote HMI device with one of the following
methods depending on the configuration:
● Touch a button configured for this action
● Exit the screen containing the [email protected] view
● If configured, a menu is displayed after you have touched an empty space over a longer
period. Select the "Close" menu item.
Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this
subject is available there.
8.11.3
Key control
Operator control options
The [email protected] view can be operated as follows:
● Starting remote control
● Forcing permission
● Ending remote control
Procedure for starting remote operation
Proceed as follows:
1. On the HMI device change to the screen with the [email protected] view.
The following options are available for establishing the connection to the remote HMI
device:
– The connection is established automatically.
– Continue to press the key
TAB
until the [email protected] view is selected.
Depending on the configuration, you may be required to enter the address of the
remote HMI device and a password.
The connection is established. The current screen of the project running on the remote
device is displayed on the screen of your HMI device.
2. You can now monitor and control this screen depending on your configuration.
3. Scroll bars are displayed if the screen of the remote HMI device is larger than that of the
current HMI device. Move the scroll bars in the direction required using keys
or
CTRL
+
CTRL
+
.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
195
Operating a project
8.11 Operating the [email protected] view
Procedure for forcing permissions
If several HMI devices access an HMI device, only one HMI device has permission to
operate.
Two cases must be distinguished for this case:
● If another HMI device is already controlling the remote HMI device, if configured
accordingly, you can force operating permission for the remote HMI device
– You are trying to operate the remote HMI device
– A dialog appears in which you are prompted to enter the appropriate password for
forcing remote control
You are now authorized to operate the remote HMI device
● If another HMI device is accessing your HMI device via the [email protected] view, you can
force local operating permission for your HMI device
– Press
SHIFT
five times consecutively.
You are given permission to operate your local HMI device
Procedure for ending remote control
You can end monitoring or control of a remote HMI device with one of the following methods
depending on the configuration:
● Press the key configured for this.
● Exit the screen containing the [email protected] view
● If configured, display a menu with
ALT
SHIFT
+
CTRL
. Select the desired menu command with
and the respective identification letter.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation
196
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.12 Project security
8.12
Project security
8.12.1
Overview
Design of the security system
The configuration engineer can protect the operation of a project by implementing a security
system.
The security system is based on authorizations, user groups and users.
If operating elements protected by a password are operated, the HMI device first requests
that you log on. A logon screen is displayed in which you enter your user name and
password. After logging on, you can operate the operating elements for which you have the
necessary authorizations.
The logon dialog can be set up by the configuration engineer via an individual operating
element.
In the same way, the configuration engineer can set up an operating element to log off. After
logging off, objects assigned password protection can no longer be operated; to do so, log
on again.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation
User groups and authorizations
Project-specific user groups are created by the configuration engineer. The "Administrators"
and "PLC User" groups are included in all projects by default. User groups are assigned
authorizations. Authorization required for an operation is specifically defined for each
individual object and function in the project.
Users and passwords
Each user is assigned to exactly one user group.
The following people are allowed to create users and assign them passwords:
● The configuration engineer during configuration
● The administrator on the HMI device
● A user with user management authorization on the HMI device
Irrespective of the user group, each user is allowed to change his own password.
Logoff times
A logoff time is specified in the system for each user. If the time between any two user
actions, such as entering a value or changing screens, exceeds this logoff time, the user is
automatically logged off. The user must then log on again to continue to operate objects
assigned password protection.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
197
Operating a project
8.12 Project security
Backup and restore
The user data is encrypted and saved on the HMI device to protect it from loss due to power
failure.
The users, passwords, group assignments and logoff times set up on the HMI device can be
backed up and restored. This prevents you having to enter all of the data again on another
HMI device.
NOTICE
The currently valid user data is overwritten in the following cases:
• Depending on the transfer settings, when the project is transferred again
• Upon restore of a backed-up project
• Upon import of the user administration via an operating element. Further information on
this may be available in your plant documentation
The retransferred or restored user data and passwords are valid with immediate effect.
Limits for user, password and user View
Number of characters
Length of user name, maximum
8.12.2
40
Length of password, minimum
3
Length of password, maximum
24
Entries in user view, maximum
50
User view
Application
The user view is used to display the users on the HMI device:
● All users on the HMI device are displayed in the user view to the administrator or to a
user with administrator authorizations
● If you are a user without user management authorization, you can only see your personal
user entry
The authorizations of a user after logging on depends on the user group to which the user is
assigned.
Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this
subject is available there.
Layout
The configuration engineer can implement a simple or extended user view.
The two user views offer the same functions. They differ only in the display of information.
198
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.12 Project security
Simple user view
If you are not logged on to the HMI device, the only entry contained in the simple user view
is "<ENTER>".
If you are logged on to the HMI device, the simple user view only displays the user name
and user group.
Extended user view
The extended user view displays information about the users.
The extended user view contains the following columns:
● Users
● Password
● Group
● Logoff time
The passwords are encrypted by appearing as asterisks.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
199
Operating a project
8.12 Project security
8.12.3
User logon
Logon dialog
Use the logon dialog to log on to the security system of the HMI device. Enter your user
name and password in the logon dialog.
The logon dialog opens in the following cases:
● You press an operating element with password protection
● You press an operating element that was configured for displaying the logon dialog
● Select the "<ENTER>" entry in the simple user view
● Select a blank entry in the extended user view
● The logon dialog will be automatically displayed when the project is started, depending on
the configuration
Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this
subject is available there.
Requirements
The logon dialog is open.
Procedure using the touch screen
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the user name and password.
Touch the corresponding text box. The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed.
2. Select "OK" to confirm logon.
200
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.12 Project security
Procedure using the keys
Proceed as follows:
1. Using the key
TAB
select the "User" text box within the logon dialog.
2. Enter the user name using the system keys.
To enter letters, switch the numerical keypad to letter assignment using the key
3. Using the key
TAB
A-Z
.
select the "Password" text box.
4. Enter the password using the system keys.
5. Touch the "OK" button to confirm your entries.
Note
The user name is not case-sensitive.
The password is case-sensitive.
Result
After successful logon to the security system, you can execute password-protected functions
on the HMI device for which you have authorizations.
If you enter a wrong password, an error message is displayed when an alarm window has
been configured.
8.12.4
User logoff
Requirements
You have logged into the security system of the HMI device.
Procedure
You have the following options for logging off:
● You press an operating element that was configured for logoff
● You will be logged off automatically if you are not operating the project and if the logoff
time has been exceeded
You will also be automatically logged off if you enter an incorrect password.
Result
You are no longer logged into the project. In order to activate an operating element with
password protection, you must first log on again.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
201
Operating a project
8.12 Project security
8.12.5
Creating users
8.12.5.1
Creating users with touch operation
Requirements
You have opened a screen containing the user view.
You have user management authorization or you are the administrator.
NOTICE
The following characters cannot be used in passwords:
• Blank
• Special characters * ? . % / \ ' "
Procedure for creating a user in the simple user view
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "<New User>" entry in the user view.
The following dialog opens:
2. Enter the desired user name and password.
Touch the corresponding text box. The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed.
3. Touch the "OK" button.
The following dialog opens:
4. Assign the user to a group.
In order to do so, open the "Groups" drop down list by means of the
and
202
button. Select
to scroll in the drop down list box.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.12 Project security
5. Touch the required entry in the drop down list box.
The selected entry is then accepted as input.
6. Touch the text box "Logoff time". The screen keyboard is displayed.
7. Enter a value between 0 and 60 for the logoff time in minutes. The value 0 stands for "no
automatic logoff."
8. Touch the "OK" button to confirm your entries.
Procedure for creating a user in the enhanced user view
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired field in the blank line of the user view.
The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed.
2. Switch into input mode by means of the
key.
3. Enter the respective user data in the field:
– Assign the user to one of the groups from the drop down list box.
– Enter a value between 0 and 60 for the logoff time in minutes. The value 0 stands for
"no automatic logoff."
Result
The new user is created.
8.12.5.2
Creating users with key operation
Requirements
You have opened a screen containing the user view.
You have user management authorization or you are the administrator.
NOTICE
The following characters cannot be used in passwords:
• Blank
• Special characters * ? . % / \ ' "
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
203
Operating a project
8.12 Project security
Procedure for creating a user in the simple user view
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the user view using the key
TAB
or using the cursor keys.
2. Select the entry "<New user>" in the user view with the cursor keys and confirm with
ENTER
.
The following dialog opens:
3. Enter the desired user name using the system keys.
4. Select the next text box with the
TAB
key and enter a password using the system keys.
5. Touch the "OK" button to confirm your entries.
The following dialog opens:
6. Select the "Group" selection box with
TAB
.
7. Assign the user to a group.
– Select
ENTER
to open the drop down list box. The drop down list box opens.
– Select the required entry using
or
.
ENTER
– Confirm your entry by pressing the key
8. Select the text box "Logoff time" with
TAB
.
.
9. Enter the desired logoff time using the system keys.
Enter a value between 0 and 60 for the logoff time in minutes. The value 0 stands for "no
automatic logoff."
10. Touch the "OK" button to confirm your entries.
204
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.12 Project security
Procedure for creating a user in the enhanced user view
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the user view with the
2. Select a blank line with the
TAB
key via the configured tab order.
or
keys.
3. Select the desired field in the blank line of the user view with the
4. Confirm your entry by pressing the key
ENTER
or
keys.
.
5. Enter the desired user data:
– Enter the data using the system keyboard. To enter letters, switch the numerical
keypad to letter assignment using the key
A-Z
.
– Assign the user to one of the groups from the drop down list box. Open the drop down
list box with the
ENTER
key and select the desired entry with the
or
keys.
– Enter a value between 0 and 60 for the logoff time in minutes. The value 0 stands for
"no automatic logoff."
6. Confirm your entry by pressing the key
ENTER
.
Result
The new user is created.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
205
Operating a project
8.12 Project security
8.12.6
Changing user data
8.12.6.1
Changing user data with touch operation
Requirements
You have opened a screen containing the user view.
Which data you are allowed to change depends on your authorization:
● You are an administrator or a user with user management authorization. In these cases
you are allowed to change the data for all the users on the HMI device in the user view:
– User name
– Group assignment
– Password
– Logoff time
● You are a user without user management authorization. In this case you are only allowed
to change your personal user data:
– Password
– Logoff time, if configured
Note
You can only change the logoff time and password for the "Admin" user.
You can only change the logoff time for the "PLC_User". This user is used for logging
on via the PLC
Procedure for changing user data in the simple user view
Proceed as follows:
1. In the user view, touch the user whose user data you want to change
2. When entering the data, use exactly the same procedure as for creating a user
Procedure for changing user data in the extended user view
Proceed as follows:
1. In the user view, touch the user whose user data you want to change
2. When entering the data, use exactly the same procedure as for creating a user
Result
The user data for the user is changed.
206
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating a project
8.12 Project security
8.12.6.2
Changing user data with key operation
Requirements
You have opened a screen containing the user view.
Which data you are allowed to change depends on your authorization:
● You are an administrator or a user with user management authorization. In these cases
you are allowed to change the data for all the users on the HMI device in the user view:
– User name
– Group assignment
– Password
– Logoff time
● You are a user without user management authorization. In this case you are only allowed
to change your personal user data:
– Password
– Logoff time, if configured
Note
You can only change the logoff time and password for the "Admin" user.
You can only change the logoff time for the "PLC_User". This user is used for logging
on via the PLC
Procedure for changing user data in the simple user view
Proceed as follows:
1. Confirm your entry by pressing the key
TAB
.
2. In the user view, use the cursor keys to select the user whose user data you want to
change. Confirm your entry by pressing the key
ENTER
.
3. When entering the data, use exactly the same procedure as for creating a user
Procedure for changing user data in the enhanced user view
Proceed as follows:
1. Confirm your entry by pressing the key
TAB
.
2. Use the cursor keys to select the field in which you want to change data. Confirm your
entry by pressing the key
ENTER
.
3. When entering the data, use exactly the same procedure as for creating a user
Result
The user data for the user is changed.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
207
Operating a project
8.13 Closing the project
8.12.7
Deleting users
Requirements
You have opened a screen containing the user view.
To delete a user, you must be an administrator or have user management authorization.
Note
The "Admin" and "PLC_User" users exist by default. These users cannot be deleted.
Procedure
To delete a user, delete the user name entered.
Result
The user has been deleted and may no longer log onto the project.
8.13
Closing the project
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Use the corresponding operating element object to close the project.
Wait for the Loader to open after you closed the project.
2. Switch off power to the HMI device.
208
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating alarms
9.1
9
Overview
Alarms
Alarms indicate events and states on the HMI device which have occurred in the system, in
the process or on the HMI device itself. A status is reported when it is received.
An alarm could trigger one of the following alarm events:
● Incoming
● Outgoing
● Acknowledge
The configuration engineer defines which alarms must be acknowledged by the user.
An alarm may contain the following information:
● Date
● Time
● Alarm text
● Location of fault
● State
● Alarm class
● Alarm number
● Alarm group
● Diagnostics capability
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
209
Operating alarms
9.1 Overview
Alarm classes
Alarms are assigned to various alarm classes:
● Error
Alarms in this class must always be acknowledged. Error alarms normally indicate critical
errors within the plant such as "Motor temperature too high"
● Operation
Warning alarms usually indicate states of a plant such as "Motor switched on"
● System
System alarms indicate states or events which occur on the HMI device
● SIMATIC diagnostic alarms
SIMATIC diagnostic alarms show states and events of the SIMATIC S7 or
SIMOTION PLCs
● User-specific alarm classes
The properties of this alarm class must be defined in the configuration
Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this
subject is available there.
Alarm groups
The configuration engineer can group alarms into alarm groups. When you acknowledge an
individual alarm of an alarm group, you acknowledge all alarms which belong to the same
alarm group.
Alarm buffer
The alarm events are stored in an internal buffer. The size of this alarm buffer depends on
the HMI device type.
Alarm report
The configuration engineer can activate alarm reporting on the project. In this case, alarm
events are output directly on the connected printer.
The configuration engineer can define whether each individual alarm is logged. An alarm of
this type is printed when the alarm events "Incoming" and "Outgoing" occur.
If you want to print alarms of the "System" alarm class, you have to print the contents of the
associated alarm buffer. For this case the configuration engineer has to configure an
operating element for printing the alarm buffer.
Alarm log
Alarm events are stored in an alarm log, provided this log file is configured. The capacity of
the log file is limited by the storage medium and system limits.
210
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating alarms
9.2 Recognizing Pending Alarms
9.2
Recognizing Pending Alarms
Introduction
You can recognize the presence of alarms which must be acknowledged by the following:
● For an HMI device with keys: The LED in the
ACK
key lights up.
● Depending on the configuration: An alarm indicator is displayed on screen.
The configuration determines whether an alarm has to be acknowledged or not. This is also
defined by the alarm class which an alarm belongs to.
LED in the "ACK" key
On an HMI device with keys, an LED is integrated in the
ACK
key. The LED is lit if there are
alarms requiring acknowledgment which must still be acknowledged.
The LED goes out when you acknowledge all alarms requiring acknowledgment.
Alarm indicator
The alarm indicator is a graphic symbol indicating pending alarms or alarms requiring
acknowledgment, depending on the configuration.
The alarm indicator flashes as long as alarms are pending for acknowledgment. The number
displayed indicates the number of pending alarms. The configuration engineer can assign
functions to be executed when the alarm indicator is operated.
Usually, the alarm indicator is only used for error alarms. Refer to your system
documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
211
Operating alarms
9.3 Displaying alarms
9.3
Displaying alarms
Displaying alarms
Alarms are displayed in the alarm view or in the alarm window on the HMI device.
Alarm view
Depending on the configuration, the alarm view is displayed as follows:
● As a single line. Alarm numbers and alarm texts are displayed as single lines
● As simple alarm view
● As extended alarm view
In the simple or extended alarm views the configuration engineer specifies the alarm
information to be displayed.
Depending on the configuration, alarms from alarm logs are also displayed in the alarm view.
Simple alarm view
0RWRUWRRKRW
The buttons have the following functions:
Buttons
Functions
Displaying infotext for an alarm.
Process alarm.
Acknowledge alarm.
Select the next or previous alarm in the list.
Scroll one page up or down.
212
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating alarms
9.3 Displaying alarms
Extended alarm view
1R
7LPH
0RWRUWRRKRW
'DWH
6WDWXV
.
The buttons have the following functions:
Buttons
Functions
Displaying infotext for an alarm.
Process alarm.
Acknowledge alarm.
Changing the column sequence and sorting in the extended alarm view
Depending on the configuration, you can change the column sequence and sorting order on
HMI devices with touch operation.
● Change column sequence
– Touch the column header which you wish to exchange with a different column header
– Keeping the touch screen pressed, move the column heading to the column heading
you wish to exchange it with
● Change sorting order
To change the sorting order of the alarms, touch the respective column header on the
touch screen
Alarm class layout
The various alarm classes are identified in order to distinguish between them in the alarm
view.
Symbol
Alarm class
!
Error
Without a symbol
Operation
Symbol depending on the configuration User-defined alarm classes
S7
SIMATIC or SIMOTION diagnostic alarms
$
System
The configuration engineer can change the symbols for the alarm classes. Please refer to
your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is
available there.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
213
Operating alarms
9.4 Display infotexts for an alarm
Alarm window
The alarm window is independent of the process screen. Depending on the configuration,
the alarm window opens automatically as soon as a new alarm is pending for
acknowledgment. The alarm window can be configured so that it only closes after all the
alarms have been acknowledged.
The layout and the operation of the alarm window are the same as for the alarm view.
Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this
subject is available there.
9.4
Display infotexts for an alarm
Displaying infotext
The configuration engineer can also provide infotext for alarms.
Procedure using the touch screen
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired alarm in the alarm view or the alarm window.
The alarm is selected.
button in the simple alarm view or
2. Touch the
in the enhanced alarm view.
If configured, the infotext assigned to this alarm is displayed.
3. Close the screen for displaying the Infotext by means of the
button.
Procedure using the keys
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the desired alarm in the alarm view.
2. Press
HELP
.
If configured, the infotext assigned to this alarm is displayed.
3. Close the infotext by pressing key
HELP
.
See also
Displaying alarms (Page 212)
214
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating alarms
9.5 Acknowledge alarm
9.5
Acknowledge alarm
Requirements
The alarm to be acknowledged is displayed in the alarm window or the alarm view.
Procedure using the touch screen
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired alarm in the alarm view or the alarm window.
The alarm is selected.
button in the simple alarm view or
2. Touch the
in the enhanced alarm view.
Procedure using the keys
The alarm view and the alarm window have a tab sequence with which you can select
operating elements and the last selected alarm using the keyboard.
1. Select the desired alarm view or alarm window with
2. Select the desired alarm. Use the
3. Press
ACK
HOME
,
END
,
or
TAB
.
keys.
.
Alternative operation
Depending on the configuration, you can also acknowledge an alarm with a function key.
Result
The alarm is acknowledged. If the alarm belongs to an alarm group, all the alarms of the
associated group are acknowledged.
More information on acknowledgment and on available alarm groups may be found in your
plant documentation.
See also
Displaying alarms (Page 212)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
215
Operating alarms
9.6 Edit alarm
9.6
Edit alarm
Introduction
The configuration engineer can assign additional functions to each alarm. These functions
are executed when the alarm is processed.
Note
When you edit an unacknowledged alarm, it is acknowledged automatically.
Requirements
The alarm to be edited is displayed in the alarm window or the alarm view.
Procedure using the touch screen
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired alarm in the alarm view or the alarm window. The alarm is selected.
2. Touch the
button in the simple alarm view or
in the enhanced alarm view.
Procedure using the keys
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the desired alarm view or alarm window with
2. Select the desired alarm. Use the
3. Continue to press the key
TAB
HOME
,
END
,
until the button
or
TAB
.
keys.
is selected in the simple alarm view or
in the extended alarm view.
4. Confirm your entry by pressing the key
ENTER
.
Result
The system executes the additional functions of the alarm. Further information on this may
be available in your plant documentation
See also
Displaying alarms (Page 212)
216
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.1
10
Overview
Introduction
Recipes are used when different variants of a product are manufactured with the same
process. In this case, the product variants differ in terms of their type and quantity of the
components, but not in terms of the manufacturing process sequence. The configuration
engineer can store the combination of each individual product variant in a recipe.
Field of application
Recipes can be used everywhere the same product components are used in variable
combinations to create different product variants.
Examples:
● Beverage industry
● Food processing industry
● Pharmaceutical industry
● Paint industry
● Building materials industry
● Steel industry
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
217
Operating recipes
10.2 Structure of a recipe
10.2
Structure of a recipe
Recipes
The recipe collection for the production of a product family can be compared to a file cabinet.
A recipe which is used to manufacture a product corresponds to a drawer in a file cabinet.
Example:
In a plant for producing fruit juice, recipes are required for different flavors. There is a recipe,
for example, for the flavors orange, grape, apple and cherry.
218
①
File cabinet
Recipe collection
Recipes for a fruit juice plant
②
Drawer
Recipe
Orange flavored drinks
③
Drawer
Recipe
Grape flavored drinks
④
Drawer
Recipe
Apple flavored drinks
⑤
Drawer
Recipe
Cherry flavored drinks
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.2 Structure of a recipe
Recipe data records
The drawers of the file cabinet are filled with suspension folders. The suspension folders in
the drawers represent records required for manufacturing various product variants.
Example:
Product variants of the flavor apple might be a soft drink, a juice or nectar, for example.
①
Drawer
Recipe
Product variants of apple flavored drinks
②
Suspension folder
Recipe data record
Apple drink
③
Suspension folder
Recipe data record
Apple nectar
④
Suspension folder
Recipe data record
Apple juice
Elements
In the figure showing the file cabinet, each suspension folder contains the same number of
sheets. Each sheet in the suspension folder corresponds to an element of the recipe data
record. All the records of a recipe contain the same elements. The records differ, however, in
the value of the individual elements.
Example:
All drinks contain the same components: water, concentrate, sugar and flavoring. The
records for soft drink, fruit juice or nectar differ, however, in the quantity of sugar used in
production.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
219
Operating recipes
10.3 Recipes in the project
10.3
Recipes in the project
Overview
If recipes are used in a project, the following components interact:
● Recipe view / recipe screen
On the HMI device, recipes are displayed and edited in the recipe view or in a recipe
screen.
– The recipe data records from the internal memory of the HMI device are displayed and
edited in the recipe view.
– The values of the recipe tags are displayed and edited in the recipe screen.
Depending on the configuration, the values displayed in the recipe view are synchronized
with the values of recipe tags.
● HMI device recipe memory
Recipes are saved in the form of data records in the HMI device recipe memory.
The recipe data can also be saved in recipe tags.
● Recipe tags
The recipe tags contain recipe data. When you edit recipes in a recipe screen, the recipe
values are stored in recipe tags. Depending on the configuration, the values of the recipe
tags are exchanged with the PLC.
The recipe tags can be synchronized with the recipe data records so that the same
values are saved in both.
● Memory card
The memory card is an external storage medium for recipe data records. The recipe data
records are exported from the HMI device recipe memory and are saved on the memory
card in a *.csv file. The records can be reimported from the memory card to the recipe
memory.
220
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.3 Recipes in the project
Data flow
The following figure shows the data flow in a project with recipes.
+0,GHYLFH
5HFLSHPHPRU\
5HFLSHYLHZ
5HFLSH
VFUHHQ
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSHQ
5HFLSHWDJ
3/&
0HPRU\FDUG
①
Editing, saving or deleting a recipe data record
②
Display recipe data record
③
Synchronize or do not synchronize recipe tags
④
Display and edit recipe tags in the recipe screen
⑤
Write records from the recipe view to the PLC or read records from the PLC and
display them in the recipe view
⑥
Recipe tags are sent to the PLC online or offline
⑦
Export or import recipe data record to memory card
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
221
Operating recipes
10.4 Displaying a recipe
10.4
Displaying a recipe
Displaying recipes
You can display and edit recipes on the HMI device with a recipe view or recipe screen.
Recipe view
A recipe view is a screen object used to manage recipe data records. The recipe view shows
recipe data records in tabular form.
Depending on the configuration, the recipe view is displayed as follows:
● As enhanced recipe view
● As simple recipe view
The configuration engineer also defines which operating elements are displayed in the recipe
view.
Enhanced recipe view
The following figure shows an example of the enhanced recipe view.
222
①
Selection box for the recipe
②
Selection box for the recipe data record
③
Element name
The element name designates a specific element in the recipe data record
④
Display field
This show the number of the selected recipe or the selected recipe data record
⑤
Value of the element
⑥
Buttons for editing a recipe data record
⑦
Status bar for display of the status messages
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.4 Displaying a recipe
Simple recipe view
The simple recipe view consists of three areas:
● Recipe list
● Record list
● Element list
In the simple recipe view, each area is shown separately on the HMI device. Depending on
the configuration, the simple recipe view starts with the recipe list or data record list.
The following figure shows an example of the record list.
-XLFH
%HYHUDJH
1HFWDU
①
Number of the recipe data record
②
Recipe data records
③
Buttons for changing the displayed list and calling the menu
Display of values
NOTICE
Changing the recipe data record in the background
Applies to the processing of a recipe data record:
If values of the corresponding recipe data record are changed by a PLC job, the recipe view
is not updated automatically.
To update the recipe view, reselect the respective recipe data record.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
223
Operating recipes
10.4 Displaying a recipe
Recipe screen
A recipe screen allows the correlation between the plant and the recipe data to be displayed
in graphic form. The configuration engineer combines I/O fields and screen objects to form a
custom input screen. The configuration engineer can distribute the I/O fields of a recipe over
several recipe screens, thus allowing recipe elements to be arranged by subject. The recipe
screen can be operated using buttons configured accordingly.
The following figure shows an example of the recipe screen.
:DWHU
O
&RQFHQWUDWH
O
6XJDU
NJ
$URPD
O
5HFLSHQDPH
2UDQJH
1R
'DWDUHFRUGQDPH
1HFWDU
1R
6DYH
'DWDIURPWKH3/&
/RDG
'DWDWR3/&
①
Element name and associated values
The element name designates a specific element in the recipe data record
②
Buttons for editing a recipe data record
③
Modified recipe view
④
Buttons for transferring recipe data
The values displayed or entered in the recipe screen are saved in recipe tags. The recipe
values are exchanged with the PLC immediately or later via these tags.
A configured recipe view can itself be a component of a recipe screen You must synchronize
the tags in order to synchronize data between the tags of the recipe screen and the recipe
data records displayed in the recipe view. Synchronization of tags is only possible in the
enhanced recipe view.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation
224
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.5 Recipe values in the HMI device and the PLC
10.5
Recipe values in the HMI device and the PLC
Introduction
You can change the values of a recipe on the HMI device and therefore influence the
manufacturing process or a machine.
Depending on the configuration, the recipe values are displayed, edited and saved in
different ways:
● If you are editing recipes with a recipe view in your project, the values are saved in recipe
data records
● If you are editing recipes in a recipe screen in your project, the values are saved in recipe
tags
Differences may occur between the display values in the recipe view and the values saved in
the associated tags in an ongoing project when you edit recipes with a recipe view and in a
recipe screen. To prevent this, the recipe data record values must be synchronized with the
values of the recipe tags.
You have however the option to perform synchronization operations at any time.
Synchronization only takes place if the configuration engineer has activated the respective
settings for a recipe.
Note
Recipe tags can only be synchronized in the extended recipe view.
Synchronizing recipe tags
Synchronization of the recipe tags depends on the configuration:
● Automatic synchronization:
The values of the recipe view are synchronized with the associated recipe tags. In this
case, changes to values in the recipe view have an immediate effect on the values of the
associated recipe tags. The values are only synchronized, when an operating element
that is outside the recipe view is operated.
● Synchronization by the user:
The values of the recipe view and the associated recipe tags are not synchronized
automatically. The configuration engineer has assigned the same function to the
button or a different operating element in the recipe view. The recipe tags and the recipe
view are only synchronized when you operate the buttons or the appropriate operating
element.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
225
Operating recipes
10.6 Operating the recipe view
Recipe tags online / offline
The configuration engineer can configure a recipe so that changes to the values of the recipe
tags do not have an immediate effect on the current process.
Synchronization of the recipe values between the HMI device and the PLC depends on
whether the configuration engineer has selected the settings "Tags online" or the setting
"Tags offline" for a recipe.
● "Tags online":
This setting has the following effect:
– When you change recipe values in the recipe screen, these changes are applied
immediately by the PLC and immediately influence the process
– If recipe values are changed in the PLC, the changed values are displayed
immediately in the recipe screen
● "Tags offline":
With this setting, changed recipe values are not synchronized immediately between the
HMI device and the PLC
In this case, the configuration engineer must configure operating elements for transferring
the values to the PLC or reading them from the PLC in a recipe screen. The recipe values
are only synchronized between HMI device and PLC when you operate the appropriate
operating element
10.6
Operating the recipe view
10.6.1
Overview
Operation
The recipe view can be operated as follows:
● Enter values for the recipe elements
● Create recipe data records
● Save recipe data records or save them under a new name
● Delete recipe data records
● Synchronize values of the recipe view with the associated recipe tags
● Transfer recipe data records from the PLC and to the PLC
226
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.6 Operating the recipe view
Operating elements of the recipe view
The following table shows the operating elements of the recipe view.
Buttons
Key combination
{
}
Functions
Creates a new recipe data record.
If a start value is configured, it is shown in the text box.
CTRL
+
CTRL
+
ENTER
CTRL
+
*
CTRL
+
INS
DEL
CTRL
+ =
CTRL
+
The recipe values from the PLC are displayed in the recipe
view.
CTRL
+
The values of the set recipe data record displayed in the
recipe view are transferred to the PLC.
Saves the displayed values of the recipe data record.
The storage location is predefined by the project.
The recipe data record is saved under a different name
irrespective of the recipe view. A dialog box opens in which
the name is entered.
The displayed recipe data record is deleted.
The values of the recipe view are synchronized with the
associated recipe tags. The values changed during editing are
written to the associated recipe tags. Subsequently all the
values of the tags are read out and updated in the table.
Operating the recipe screen
You operate the recipes in a recipe screen with the operating elements provided by the
configuration engineer.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation
10.6.2
Creating a recipe data record
Introduction
You create a new recipe data record by modifying an existing record. You then save the
modified data record under a new name.
Requirements
A screen with a recipe view is displayed
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
227
Operating recipes
10.6 Operating the recipe view
Procedure using the touch screen
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe for which you want to create
a new recipe data record.
.
2. Touch
A new recipe data record with the next available number is created.
If you change the new data record number to an existing data record number, the existing
data record is overwritten.
3. Enter values for the elements of the data record.
The elements of the recipe data record can be assigned default values depending on the
configuration.
.
4. Touch
5. Enter a name for the data record.
The data record is saved under the new name.
If the recipe data record already exists, a dialog is opened. In this dialog, specify whether
the existing data record is to be overwritten.
Procedure using the keys
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe for which you want to create
a new recipe data record.
{
2. Press
CTRL
+
}
.
A new recipe data record with the next available number is created.
If you change the new data record number to an existing data record number, the existing
data record is overwritten.
3. Enter values for the elements of the data record.
The elements of the recipe data record can be assigned default values depending on the
configuration.
4. Press
CTRL
+ * .
5. Enter a name for the data record.
6. Confirm your entry.
The data record is saved under the new name.
If the recipe data record already exists, a dialog is opened. In this dialog, specify whether
the existing data record is to be overwritten.
Result
The new recipe data record is saved to the selected recipe.
228
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.6 Operating the recipe view
See also
Recipes in the project (Page 220)
10.6.3
Editing a recipe data record
Introduction
Edit the values of the recipe data records and save them in a recipe view.
Synchronization with the PLC
If you want to display the current recipe values from the PLC in the recipe view, you first
have to read the current values from the PLC with
.
The values changed in the recipe view only become effective when the amended data record
is transferred to the PLC by means of the
button.
Requirements
A screen with a recipe view is displayed
Procedure using the touch screen
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record you want to change.
3. Change the data record as required.
4. Save your changes by means of the
button.
If you want to save the recipe data record under a different name, touch the
key.
5. The recipe data record is saved.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
229
Operating recipes
10.6 Operating the recipe view
Procedure using the keys
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record you want to change.
3. Change the data record as required.
4. Save your changes with
CTRL
+
ENTER
.
If you want to save the recipe data record under a different name, press
CTRL
+ * .
The recipe data record is saved.
Result
The edited recipe data record has now been saved in the selected recipe.
See also
Recipes in the project (Page 220)
10.6.4
Deleting a recipe data record
Introduction
You can delete all the data records of a recipe which are not required.
Requirements
A screen with a recipe view is displayed
Procedure using the touch screen
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record you want to delete.
3. Touch
230
.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.6 Operating the recipe view
Procedure using the keys
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record you want to delete.
3. Press
CTRL
+
INS
DEL
.
Result
The recipe data record is deleted.
See also
Recipes in the project (Page 220)
10.6.5
Synchronizing tags
Introduction
The values of the recipe elements can be saved to recipe tags, depending on the
configuration.
Differences may occur between the display values in the recipe view and the actual values of
tags in an ongoing project. Synchronize the tags to equalize such differences.
Synchronization always includes all the variables which belong to a recipe data record.
NOTICE
Changed tag name
Tags and the value of the recipe data record cannot be assigned to each other if the tag
name of the tag to be synchronized has been changed. The tags in question are not
synchronized.
Note
Recipe tags can only be synchronized in the enhanced recipe view.
Requirements
A screen with a recipe view is displayed
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
231
Operating recipes
10.6 Operating the recipe view
Procedure using the touch screen
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record you want to synchronize.
.
3. Touch
Procedure using the keys
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record you want to synchronize.
3. Press
CTRL
+
=
.
Result
The elements of the recipe data record are synchronized with the recipe tags.
If the values of the recipe view and the tag do not match, the more current value is accepted.
See also
Recipes in the project (Page 220)
10.6.6
Reading a recipe data record from the PLC
Introduction
In the current project, the values which are also stored in the recipes in the HMI device can
be changed directly in the plant. This is the case, for example, if a valve was opened further
directly at the plant than is stored in the recipe. The values of the recipe data records saved
in the HMI device possibly no longer match the values in the PLC.
To synchronize the recipe values, read the values from the PLC and display them in the
recipe view.
Requirements
A screen with a recipe view is displayed
232
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.6 Operating the recipe view
Procedure using the touch screen
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record to which you want to apply the values from the PLC.
.
3. Touch
The values are read from the PLC.
4. If you want to store the displayed values in the HMI device, touch the
button.
Procedure using the keys
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record to which you want to apply the values from the PLC.
3. Press
CTRL
+
.
The values are read from the PLC.
4. If you want to store the displayed values in the HMI device, press the keys
CTRL
+
ENTER
.
Result
The values were read from the PLC, displayed on the HMI device and saved to the selected
recipe data record.
See also
Recipes in the project (Page 220)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
233
Operating recipes
10.6 Operating the recipe view
10.6.7
Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC
Introduction
In order for an edited recipe data record to take effect in the process, you must transfer the
values to the PLC.
The display values in the recipe view are always transferred to the PLC.
Requirements
A screen with a recipe view is displayed
Procedure using the touch screen
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record whose values you want to transfer to the PLC.
.
3. Touch
Procedure using the keys
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record whose values you want to transfer to the PLC.
3. Press
CTRL
+
.
Result
The display values in the recipe view were transferred to the PLC and take effect in the
process.
See also
Recipes in the project (Page 220)
234
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.7 Operating the simple recipe view
10.7
Operating the simple recipe view
10.7.1
Overview
Introduction
The simple recipe view consists of three areas:
● Recipe list
● Record list
● Element list
You can use the context menu to operate each of these display areas.
Operation
The simple recipe view can be operated as follows:
● Enter values for the recipe elements
● Create recipe data records
● Save recipe data records or save them under a new name
● Delete recipe data records
● Transfer recipe data records from the PLC and to the PLC
Operating elements of the simple recipe view
Toggle between the display areas and the context menus to operate the simple recipe views.
The table below shows the operation of the display area.
Touch operation
Key control
Functions
Touching an entry
ENTER
The next lower display area opens.
ESC
The next higher display area opens.
The context menu of the display area opens.
The table below shows the operation of the context menu.
Touch operation
Key control
ESC
Touch the menu
command
Input of the number
of the menu
command
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Functions
The menu is closed.
The display area opens.
The menu command is executed.
235
Operating recipes
10.7 Operating the simple recipe view
Context menus of the simple recipe view
A number is assigned to each menu command which you can use to call the menu
command with key control.
With touch operation, touch the menu command to execute it.
Some menu functions can also be called directly in the lists of the simple recipe view using
the keys.
● Recipe list
No.
Menu command
Key combination Functions
0
New
1
Displaying infotext
HELP
2
Open
ENTER
A new recipe data record is created for the selected
recipe.
If a start value is configured, it is shown in the text box.
The infotext configured for the simple recipe view is
displayed.
The record list of the selected recipe opens.
● Record list
No.
Menu command
Key combination Functions
0
New
1
Delete
2
Save as
The selected record is saved under a different name
irrespective of the simple recipe view. A dialog box
opens in which the name is entered.
3
Rename
The selected record is renamed. A dialog box opens in
which the name is entered.
A new recipe data record is created for the selected
recipe.
If a start value is configured, it is shown in the text box.
The selected record is deleted.
INS
DEL
● Element list
No.
Menu command
0
Save
Key combination Functions
The selected record is renamed.
1
To PLC
The display values of the selected record are
transferred from the HMI device to the PLC.
2
From PLC
The recipe values from the PLC are displayed on the
HMI device in the recipe view.
3
Save as
The selected record is renamed. A dialog box opens in
which the name is entered.
Touch operation of the menu
Touch the desired menu command. The command is executed.
Key control of the menu
Select the required entry using
or
. Press
ENTER
.
Alternatively, press the numerical key with the number of the desired menu command.
The command is executed.
236
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.7 Operating the simple recipe view
Operating the recipe screen
You operate the recipes in a recipe screen with the operating elements provided by the
configuration engineer.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation
10.7.2
Creating a recipe data record
Introduction
Create a new recipe data record in the recipe list or in the record list. Then enter the values
for the new record in the element list and save the record.
Requirements
A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe list contains several recipes: Select the recipe for which you want to create a
new recipe data record.
2. Open the recipe list menu.
3. Select the menu command "0 New".
Creates a new record
The element list of the new record opens.
4. Enter values for the elements of the data record.
The tags of the record can be assigned default values depending on the configuration.
5. Open the element list menu and select the menu command "0 Save".
6. Enter a name for the new record.
7. Confirm your entries.
If you change the new data record number to an existing data record number, the existing
data record is overwritten.
Result
The new recipe data record is saved to the selected recipe.
See also
Recipes in the project (Page 220)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
237
Operating recipes
10.7 Operating the simple recipe view
10.7.3
Editing a recipe data record
Introduction
Edit the values of the recipe data records in a simple recipe view.
Synchronization with the PLC
If you want to display the current recipe values from the PLC in the simple recipe view, you
first have to read the current values from the PLC with the menu command "2 from PLC" in
the element list.
The values changed in the recipe view only take effect in the PLC when you transfer the
edited data record to the PLC with the menu command "1 to PLC".
Requirements
A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe list contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Open the data record list.
3. Select the recipe data record you want to change.
4. Open the element list.
5. Change the values of the records as required.
6. Save your changes with the menu command "0 Save".
The recipe data record is saved.
Result
The edited recipe data record has now been saved in the selected recipe.
See also
Recipes in the project (Page 220)
238
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.7 Operating the simple recipe view
10.7.4
Deleting a recipe data record
Introduction
You can delete all the data records which are not required.
Requirements
A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed.
Procedure using the touch screen
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe list contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Open the data record list.
3. Select the data record you want to delete.
4. Open the menu.
5. Select the menu command "1 Delete".
Procedure using the keys
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe list contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Open the data record list.
3. Select the data record you want to delete.
4. Press
INS
DEL
.
Result
The data record is deleted.
See also
Recipes in the project (Page 220)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
239
Operating recipes
10.7 Operating the simple recipe view
10.7.5
Reading a recipe data record from the PLC
Introduction
The values of recipe elements are exchanged with the PLC via tags.
In the current project, the values which are also stored in the recipes in the HMI device can
be changed directly in the plant. This is the case, for example, if a valve was opened further
directly at the plant than is stored in the recipe. The values of the tags on the HMI device
possibly no longer match the values in the PLC.
To synchronize the recipe values, read the values from the PLC and display them in the
recipe view.
Requirements
A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe list contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the element list of the recipe data record to which you want to apply the values
from the PLC.
3. Open the menu.
4. Select the menu command "2 from PLC".
The values are read from the PLC.
5. If you want to save the display values in the HMI device, select the menu command "0
Save".
Result
The values were read from the PLC, displayed on the HMI device and saved to the selected
recipe data record.
See also
Recipes in the project (Page 220)
240
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.7 Operating the simple recipe view
10.7.6
Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC
Introduction
In order for an edited recipe data record to take effect in the process, you must transfer the
values to the PLC.
The display values in the recipe view are always transferred to the PLC.
Requirements
A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe list contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the element list of the recipe data record whose values you want to transfer to the
PLC.
3. Open the menu.
4. Select the menu command "1 To PLC".
Result
The values of the recipe data record were transferred to the PLC and take effect in the
process.
See also
Recipes in the project (Page 220)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
241
Operating recipes
10.8 Exporting a recipe data record
10.8
Exporting a recipe data record
Introduction
You can export one or more recipe data records to a CSV file, depending on the
configuration. After export, the values in the recipe data record can be further processed in a
spreadsheet program such as MS Excel. The degree to which you can influence the export
depends on the configuration:
Requirements
● A screen with a recipe view is displayed
● An operating element with the function "Export record" has been configured.
● The following tags are configured equally in the recipe view and for the "Export record"
operating element.
– Recipe number
– Data record number
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record you want to export.
3. Operate the operating element which was configured for export, for example the "Export
data record" button.
The data record is exported as a CSV file to an external data medium.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation
Result
The recipe data record is exported.
See also
Recipes in the project (Page 220)
242
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.9 Importing a recipe data record
10.9
Importing a recipe data record
Introduction
You can import values from a CSV file to a recipe data record, depending on the
configuration.
Requirements
● An operating element with the function "Import data record" has been configured, for
example a button
● A screen with a recipe view is displayed
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the recipe
data record to be imported.
2. Operate the operating element with the function "Import data record".
The record is imported from an external data medium as a CSV file and then displayed in
the recipe view after import.
Result
The imported recipe data record is saved on the HMI device.
Deviating structure
If the structure of the CSV file differs from the structure of the recipe, deviations are handled
as follows:
● Any additional values in the CSV file will be rejected
● The system applies the configured default value to the recipe data record if the CSV file
contains an insufficient number of values
● If the CSV file contains values of the wrong data type, the configured default value is set
in the recipe data record
Example:
The imported CSV file contains values that were entered as floating point numbers
However, the corresponding tag expects an integer value. In this case, the system
discards the imported value and uses the configured default
See also
Recipes in the project (Page 220)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
243
Operating recipes
10.10 Examples
10.10
Examples
10.10.1
Entering a recipe data record
Introduction
You would like to enter production data on the HMI device without interrupting the process in
the machine or plant. For this reason, the production data should not be transferred to the
PLC.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Call the recipe view or a recipe screen.
2. Select the desired recipe data record.
3. Enter the values of the elements.
4. Save the recipe data record.
The recipe data record is saved in the internal memory of the HMI device.
The following figure shows the data flow schematically.
+0,GHYLFH
5HFLSHPHPRU\
5HFLSHYLHZ
5HFLSH
VFUHHQ
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSHQ
5HFLSHWDJ
3/&
244
①
Display recipe data record
②
Save recipe data record
③
Tags are synchronized
④
Display and edit recipe tags in the recipe screen
⑤
Tags are offline
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Operating recipes
10.10 Examples
10.10.2
Manual production sequence
Introduction
You request the production data of different workpieces from the PLC and display this data
on the screen of the HMI device for inspection. You want to correct the transferred
production data in the recipe view or the recipe screen if necessary.
Procedure
A scanner connected to the PLC reads the barcode of a workpiece. The barcode names
correspond to the names in the recipe data record. Based on the barcode name, the PLC
can read the required recipe data record. The recipe data record is displayed for inspection
on the HMI device. You can now edit and save the recipe data record. Then transfer the
edited recipe data record to the PLC again.
The following figure shows the data flow schematically.
+0,GHYLFH
5HFLSHYLHZ
5HFLSHPHPRU\
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSHQ
5HFLSH
VFUHHQ
5HFLSHWDJ
3/&
①
The recipe data record is read from the PLC and written to the PLC again following
changes
②
Display and edit recipe tags in the recipe screen
③
Tags are synchronized
④
Recipe data records are saved in the recipe memory of the HMI device
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
245
Operating recipes
10.10 Examples
246
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Maintenance and care
11.1
11
Maintenance and care
Scope of maintenance
The HMI device is designed for maintenance-free operation. The touch screen and keyboard
membrane should nevertheless be cleaned regularly.
Preparation
CAUTION
Inadvertent operation
Always switch off the HMI device before cleaning it. This will ensure that you do not trigger
functions unintentionally when you touch the keys.
Requirements
Use a cleaning cloth dampened with a cleaning agent to clean the equipment. Only use
water with a little liquid soap or a screen cleaning foam.
CAUTION
Do not clean the HMI device with compressed air or steam jet blowers. Never use
aggressive solvents or scouring powder.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the HMI device.
2. Spray the cleaning solution onto a cleaning cloth.
Do not spray directly onto the HMI device.
3. Clean the HMI device.
When cleaning the display wipe from the screen edge inwards.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
247
Maintenance and care
11.2 Clean screen on MP 277 Touch
11.2
Clean screen on MP 277 Touch
Clean screen
The HMI touch screen can be cleaned when it is switched on and a project is running. An
operating element must be available in the project with which the clean screen can be called.
Once the clean screen is activated, touch screen operation is locked for a configured period
of time. The time the touch screen is locked can be set between 5 and 30 seconds. The time
remaining for the lockout is indicated by a progress bar.
WARNING
Locking operating elements
Always open the clean screen or switch off the HMI device before you clean the touch
screen while the system is running!
It is important to note when the clean screen function is unlocked. Ignoring this instruction
may lead to inadvertent operation of a function.
11.3
Spare Parts and Repairs
Repairs
In case of repair, the HMI device must be shipped to the Return Center in Fürth. Repairs
may only be carried out at the Return Center in Fürth.
Depending on the work necessary to repair the device, the Center may decide to give you a
credit note. In this case, it is your responsibility to order a new device.
The address is:
Returns Center
Siemensstr. 2
90766 Fürth
Germany
Spare parts
You can find spare parts and accessories for the HMI devices in the section Accessories
(Page 23).
248
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
12
Technical specifications
12.1
Dimension drawings
12.1.1
Dimension drawings of the MP 277 8" Touch
The HMI device MP 277 8" Touch is available in two enclosure models with different product
versions. The product version is indicated on the back of the HMI device.
Dimensional drawing of MP 277 8" Touch up to and including product version 05
$OOGLPHQVLRQVLQPP
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
249
Technical specifications
12.1 Dimension drawings
Dimensional drawing of MP 277 8" Touch as of product version 15
$OOGLPHQVLRQVLQPP
250
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Technical specifications
12.1 Dimension drawings
12.1.2
Dimension drawings of the MP 277 8" Key
$OOGLPHQVLRQVLQPP
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
251
Technical specifications
12.1 Dimension drawings
12.1.3
Dimension Drawings of the MP 277 10" Touch
The HMI device MP 277 10" Touch is available in two enclosure models with different
product versions. The product version is indicated on the back of the HMI device.
Dimension drawing of MP 277 10" Touch up to and including product version 06
$OOGLPHQVLRQVLQPP
252
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Technical specifications
12.1 Dimension drawings
Dimensional drawing of MP 277 10" Touch as of product version 15
$OOGLPHQVLRQVLQPP
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
253
Technical specifications
12.1 Dimension drawings
12.1.4
Dimension drawings of the MP 277 10" Key
254
$OOGLPHQVLRQVLQPP
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Technical specifications
12.2 Specifications
12.2
Specifications
12.2.1
Specifications of the MP 277 Touch
HMI device
Weight without packaging
MP 277 8" Touch
MP 277 10" Touch
Approx. 1 610 g
Approx. 2 650 g
MP 277 8" Touch
MP 277 10" Touch
153.7 mm x 115.8 mm (7.5")
211.2 mm x 158.4 mm (10.4")
Display
Display area, active
Type
LCD TFT
Resolution
640 x 480 pixels
Colors, displayable
64k
Brightness control
Yes
Backlighting
CCFL
Half brightness life time,
typical
50 000 h
Input device
MP 277 8" Touch
Type
MP 277 10" Touch
Touch screen, analog, resistive
Memory
MP 277 8" Touch
Application memory
MP 277 10" Touch
6 MB
Ports
MP 277 8" Touch
1 x RS 422/RS 485
2 x USB
MP 277 10" Touch
Max. 12 Mbps
USB host; conforms to USB standard 1.1
(supporting low-speed and full-speed USB devices)
Maximum load 500 mA
1 x Ethernet
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
RJ45 10/100 Mbps
255
Technical specifications
12.2 Specifications
Supply voltage
MP 277 8" Touch
MP 277 10" Touch
Rated voltage
+24 V DC
Range, permissible
20.4 V to 28.8 V (-15%, +20%)
Transients, maximum
permissible
35 V (500 ms)
Time between two transients,
minimum
50 s
Current consumption
• Typical
•
• Constant current,
•
maximum
•
• Power on current surge I2t
Approx. 600 mA
Approx. 1 000 mA
Approx. 1 A2s
•
•
•
Fuse, internal
Approx. 700 mA
Approx. 1 100 mA
Approx. 1 A2s
Electronic
Miscellaneous
MP 277 8" Touch
Realtime clock,
Yes
Magnetic field intensity
1)
12.2.2
MP 277 10" Touch
buffered 1)
50/60 Hz;100 A/m RMS
Bridging time of the buffering, approx. 6 weeks.
Specifications of the MP 277 Key
HMI device
Weight without packaging
MP 277 8" Key
MP 277 10" Key
Approx. 2 250 g
Approx. 4 950 g
MP 277 8" Key
MP 277 10" Key
153.7 mm x 115.8 mm (7.5")
211.2 mm x 158.4 mm (10.4")
Display
Display area, active
Type
Resolution
Colors, displayable
64k
Brightness control
Yes
Backlighting
Half brightness life time, typical
256
LCD TFT
640 x 480 pixels
CCFL
50 000 h
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Technical specifications
12.2 Specifications
Input device
MP 277 8" Key
MP 277 10" Key
Type
Membrane keyboard
Function keys
26 function keys,
34 function keys,
of which 18 with LED
of which 26 with LED
Memory
MP 277 8" Key
MP 277 10" Key
Application memory
6 MB
Ports
MP 277 8" Key
MP 277 10" Key
1 x RS 422/RS 485
Max. 12 Mbps
2 x USB
USB host; conforms to USB standard 1.1
(supporting low-speed and full-speed USB devices)
Maximum load 500 mA
1 x Ethernet
RJ45 10/100 Mbps
Supply voltage
MP 277 8" Key
MP 277 10" Key
Rated voltage
+24 V DC
Range, permissible
20,4 V to 28.8 V (–15 %, +20%)
Transients, maximum permissible
35 V (500 ms)
Time between two transients,
minimum
Current consumption
• Typical
• Constant current, maximum
• Power on current surge I2t
50 s
•
•
•
Approx. 700 mA
Approx. 1 100 mA
Approx. 1 A2s
Fuse, internal
•
•
•
Approx. 800 mA
Approx. 1 200 mA
Approx. 1 A2s
Electronic
Miscellaneous
MP 277 8" Key
Realtime clock,
Magnetic field intensity
1)
MP 277 10" Key
buffered 1)
Yes
50/60 Hz;100 A/m RMS
Bridging time of the buffering, approx. 6 weeks.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
257
Technical specifications
12.3 Bit assignment of the direct keys
12.3
Bit assignment of the direct keys
The following figures show the assignment of the keys and LEDs to the bytes in the PLC
process image.
Further information may be available in your plant documentation.
Note
Do not use the LED bits "ACK", "A-Z l", "A-Z r" and "HELP" when a project is running on the
HMI device.
Bit assignment of the direct keys for the MP 277 8" Key
%XWWRQELWV
/('ELWV
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
Q
)
)
)
)
Q
)
)
Q
.
.
)
)
)
)
.
.
.
.
$&.
$/7
&75/ 6+,)7
.
.
%\WH
)
)
)
)
.
.
.
.
$&.
$=O $=U +(/3
Q
Q
)
.
)
.
)
)
)
)
.
.
Bit assignment of the direct keys for the MP 277 10" Key
%XWWRQELWV
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
Q
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
Q
.
.
.
.
)
)
)
)
Q
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Q
.
.
.
.
$/7
&75/ 6+,)7 .
.
.
.
Q
$&.
$=O $=U +(/3 .
$&.
258
/('ELWV
%\WH
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Technical specifications
12.3 Bit assignment of the direct keys
Bit assignment of the direct keys for the MP 277 8" Touch
7RXFKDVVLJQPHQW
%\WH
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Bit assignment of the direct keys for the MP 277 10" Touch
7RXFKDVVLJQPHQW
%\WH
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
See also
Direct keys (Page 164)
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
259
Technical specifications
12.4 Description of the ports
12.4
Description of the ports
12.4.1
Power supply
Plug connector, 2-pin
Pin
12.4.2
Assignment
1
+24 VDC (L+)
2
GND 24 V (M)
X10/IF 1B (RS 422/RS 485)
Sub-D socket, 9-pin, with screw lock
Pin
1)
260
Assignment for the RS 422
Assignment for the RS 485
1
n. c.
n. c.
2
GND 24 V
GND 24 V
3
TxD+
Data channel B (+)
4
RD+
RTS 1)
5
GND 5 V, floating
GND 5 V, floating
6
+5 VDC, floating
+5 VDC, floating
7
+24 VDC, out (max. 100 mA)
+24 VDC, out (max. 100 mA)
8
TxD–
Data channel A (–)
9
RxD–
RTS 1)
On pin 4 or pin 9, can be set with DIP switch on the rear of the device
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Technical specifications
12.4 Description of the ports
12.4.3
X20, X21 (USB)
USB socket
Pin
12.4.4
Assignment
1
+5 VDC, out (max. 500 mA)
2
USB-DN
3
USB-DP
4
GND
X1 (Ethernet/LAN)
RJ45 plug connector
Pin
Assignment
1
Tx+
2
Tx–
3
Rx+
4
n. c.
5
n. c.
6
Rx–
7
n. c.
8
n. c.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
261
Technical specifications
12.4 Description of the ports
262
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
A
Appendix
A.1
ESD guideline
What does ESD mean?
All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to
their design, these electronic components are highly sensitive to overvoltage and thus to the
discharge of static electricity. Such electronic components are labeled as Electrostatic
Sensitive Device.
Short description
The following abbreviations are commonly used for electrostatic sensitive devices:
● EGB – Elektrostatisch Gefährdete Bauteile/Baugruppen (Germany)
● ESD – Electrostatic Sensitive Device (internationally recognized term)
Electrostatic charge
CAUTION
Electrostatic charge
ESDs may be destroyed by voltages far below the level perceived by human beings.
Voltages of this kind develop when a component or an assembly is touched by a person
who is not grounded against static electricity. Usually, it is unlikely that damage to an ESD
as a result of overvoltage is detected immediately but may become apparent only after a
longer period of operation.
Avoid electrostatic charge to your body before you touch the ESD.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
263
Appendix
A.1 ESD guideline
Anyone who is not connected to the electrical potential of their surroundings is subject to
electrostatic charge.
9ROWDJH
The following figure indicates the maximum electrostatic charge anyone is subjected to when
coming into contact with the materials shown. These values correspond to IEC 801-2
specifications.
>[email protected]
>@
5HODWLYHKXPLGLW\
①
Synthetic materials
②
Wool
③
Antistatic materials such as wood or concrete
Protective measures against discharge of static electricity
CAUTION
Grounding measures
No equipotential bonding is possible without ground. Electrostatic charges will not be
discharged and may damage the ESD.
When working with electrostatic sensitive devices, make sure that the person, the
workplace and the packaging are properly grounded.
As a rule, only touch the ESD if this is unavoidable. This may be the case for maintenance.
When you touch ESD modules, avoid touching the pins or the PCB tracks. This measure
prevents discharged energy from reaching and damaging components sensitive to voltage.
Discharge electrostatic electricity from your body if you are performing measurements on an
ESD. Do so by touching grounded metallic parts.
Always use grounded measuring instruments.
264
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
A.2
System alarms
Introduction
System alarms on the HMI device provide information about internal states of the HMI device
and PLC.
The following overview shows the causes of system alarms and how to eliminate the cause
of error.
Depending on scope of functions, only some of the system alarms described in this section
apply to the various HMI devices.
Note
System alarms are only indicated if an alarm window was configured. System alarms are
output in the language currently set on your HMI device.
System alarm parameters
System alarms may contain encrypted parameters which are relevant to troubleshooting
because they provide a reference to the source code of the runtime software. These
parameters are output after the text "Error code:"
Meaning of the system alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
10000
The print job could not be started or was canceled due
to an unknown error. Faulty printer setup. Or: No
authorization is available for accessing the network
printer.
Power supply failure during data transfer.
Check the printer settings, cable connections and the
power supply.
Set up the printer once again. Obtain a network printer
authorization.
If the error persists, contact the Hotline!
10001
No printer is installed or a default printer has not been
set up.
Install a printer and/or select it as the default printer.
10002
Overflow of the graphics buffer for printing. Up to two
images are buffered.
Allow sufficient intervals between successive print
jobs.
10003
Images can now be buffered again.
—
10004
Overflow of the buffer for printing lines in text mode
(e.g. alarms). Up to 1000 lines are buffered.
Allow sufficient intervals between successive print
jobs.
10005
Text lines can now be buffered again.
—
10006
The Windows printing system reports an error. Refer
to the output text and the error ID to determine the
possible causes. Nothing is printed or the print is
faulty.
Repeat the action if necessary.
20010
An error has occurred in the specified script line.
Select the specified script line in the configuration.
Execution of the script was therefore aborted. Note the Ensure that the tags used are of the allowed types.
system alarm that may have occurred prior to this.
Check system functions for the correct number and
types of parameters.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
265
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
20011
An error has occurred in a script that was called by the
specified script.
Execution of the script was therefore aborted in the
called script.
Note the system alarm that may have occurred prior to
this.
In the configuration, select the script that has been
called directly or indirectly by the specified script.
Ensure that the tags used are of the allowed types.
Check system functions for the correct number and
types of parameters.
20012
The configuration data is inconsistent. The script could Recompile the configuration.
therefore not be generated.
20013
The scripting component of WinCC flexible Runtime is
not correctly installed. Therefore, no scripts can be
executed.
Reinstall WinCC flexible Runtime.
20014
The system function returns a value that is not written
in any return tag.
Select the specified script in the configuration.
Check whether the script name has been assigned a
value.
20015
Too many successive scripts have been triggered in
Find what is triggering the scripts. Extend the times,
short intervals. When more than 20 scripts are queued e.g. the polling time of the tags which trigger the
for processing, any subsequent scripts are rejected. In scripts.
this case, the script indicated in the alarm is not
executed.
30010
The tag could not accept the function result, e.g. when Check the tag type of the system function parameter.
it has exceeded the value range.
30011
A system function could not be executed because the
function was assigned an invalid value or type in the
parameter.
Check the parameter value and tag type of the invalid
parameter. If a tag is used as a parameter, check its
value.
40010
The system function could not be executed since the
parameters could not be converted to a common tag
type.
Check the parameter types in the configuration.
40011
The system function could not be executed since the
parameters could not be converted to a common tag
type.
Check the parameter types in the configuration.
50000
The HMI device is receiving data faster than it is
capable of processing. Therefore, no further data is
accepted until all current data have been processed.
Data exchange then resumes.
—
50001
Data exchange has been resumed.
—
60000
This alarm is generated by the “DisplaySystemAlarms” —
function. The text to be displayed is transferred to the
function as a parameter.
60010
The file could not be copied in the direction defined
because one of the two files is currently open or the
source/target path is not available.
It is possible that the Windows user has no access
rights to one of the two files.
Restart the system function or check the paths of the
source/target files. Using Windows NT/2000/XP: The
user executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be
granted access rights for the files.
60011
An attempt was made to copy a file to itself.
It is possible that the Windows user has no access
rights to one of the two files.
Check the path of the source/target file.
Using Windows NT/2000/XP with NTFS: The user
executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted
access rights for the files.
70010
The application could not be started because it could
not be found in the path specified or there is
insufficient memory space.
Check whether the application exists in the specified
path or close other applications.
266
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
70011
Effect/cause
Remedy
The system time could not be modified.
The error alarm only appears in connection with area
pointer "Date/time PLC". Possible causes:
• An invalid time was transferred in the job mailbox.
• The Windows user has no right to modify the
system time.
Check the time which is to be set.
Using Windows NT/2000/XP: The user executing
WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted the right to
change the system time of the operating system.
If the first parameter in the system alarm is displayed
with the value 13, the second parameter indicates the
byte containing the incorrect value.
70012
An error occurred when executing the function
"StopRuntime" with the option "Runtime and operating
system".
Windows and WinCC flexible Runtime are not closed.
One possible cause is that other programs cannot be
closed.
Close all programs currently running.
Then close Windows.
70013
The system time could not be modified because an
invalid value was entered. Incorrect separators may
have been used.
Check the time which is to be set.
70014
The system time could not be modified. Possible
causes:
• An invalid time was transferred.
• The Windows user has no right to modify the
system time.
• Windows rejects the setting request.
Check the time which is to be set.
Using Windows NT/2000/XP: The user executing
WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted the right to
change the system time of the operating system.
70015
The system time could not be read because Windows
rejects the reading function.
—
70016
An attempt was made to select a screen by means of Check the screen number in the function or job with
a system function or job. This is not possible because the screen numbers configured.
the screen number specified does not exist.
Assign the number to a screen if necessary.
Or: A screen could not be generated due to insufficient
system memory.
70017
Date/time is not read from the area pointer because
the address set in the PLC is either not available or
has not been set up.
Change the address or set up the address in the PLC.
70018
Acknowledgment that the password list has been
successfully imported.
—
70019
Acknowledgment that the password list has been
successfully exported.
—
70020
Acknowledgment for activation of alarm reporting.
—
70021
Acknowledgment for deactivation of alarm reporting.
—
70022
Acknowledgment to starting the Import Password List
action.
—
70023
Acknowledgment to starting the Export Password List
action.
—
70024
The value range of the tag has been exceeded in the
system function.
The calculation of the system function is not
performed.
Check the desired calculation and correct it if
necessary.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
267
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
70025
The value range of the tag has been exceeded in the
system function.
The calculation of the system function is not
performed.
Check the desired calculation and correct it if
necessary.
70026
No other screens are stored in the internal screen
memory.
No other screens can be selected.
—
70027
The backup of the RAM file system has been started.
—
70028
The files from the RAM have been copied in the Flash
memory.
The files from the RAM have been copied in the Flash
memory. Following a restart, these saved files are
copied back to the RAM file system.
—
70029
Backup of the RAM file system has failed.
No backup copy of the RAM file system has been
made.
Check the settings in the "Control Panel > OP" dialog
and save the RAM file system using the "Save Files"
button in the "Persistent Storage" tab.
70030
The parameters configured for the system function are Compare the parameters configured for the system
faulty.
function with the parameters configured for the PLCs
The connection to the new PLC was not established.
and correct them as necessary.
70031
The PLC configured in the system function is not an
S7 PLC.
The connection to the new PLC was not established.
70032
The object configured with this number in the tab order Check the number of the tab order and correct it if
is not available in the selected screen.
necessary.
The screen changes but the focus is set to the first
object.
70033
An e-mail cannot be sent because a TCP/IP
Check the network connection to the SMTP server and
connection to the SMTP server no longer exists.
re-establish it if necessary.
This system alarm is generated only at the first
attempt. All subsequent unsuccessful attempts to send
an e-mail will no longer generate a system alarm. The
event is regenerated when an e-mail has been
successfully sent in the meantime.
The central e-mail component in WinCC flexible
Runtime attempts, in regular intervals (1 minute), to
establish the connection to the SMTP server and to
send the remaining e-mails.
70034
Following a disruption, the TCP/IP connection to the
SMTP server could be re-established.
The queued e-mails are then sent.
—
70036
No SMTP server for sending e-mails is configured. An
attempt to connect to an SMTP server has failed and it
is not possible to send e-mails.
WinCC flexible Runtime generates the system alarm
after the first attempt to send an e-mail.
Configure an SMTP server:
An e-mail cannot be sent for unknown reasons.
The contents of the e-mail are lost.
Check the e-mail parameters (recipient etc.).
70037
268
Compare the S7 PLC name parameter configured for
the system function with the parameters configured for
the PLC and correct them as necessary.
In WinCC flexible Engineering System
using "Device settings > Device settings"
In the Windows CE operating system
using "Control Panel > Internet Settings > E-mail >
SMTP Server"
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
70038
The SMTP server has rejected sending or forwarding
an e-mail because the domain of the recipient is
unknown to the server or because the SMTP server
requires authentication.
The contents of the e-mail are lost.
Check the domain of the recipient address or
deactivate the authentication on the SMTP server if
possible. SMTP authentication is currently not used in
WinCC flexible Runtime.
70039
The syntax of the e-mail address is incorrect or
contains illegal characters.
The contents of the e-mail are discarded.
Check the e-mail address of the recipient.
70040
The syntax of the e-mail address is incorrect or
contains illegal characters.
—
70041
The import of the user management was aborted due
to an error.
Nothing was imported.
Check your user management or transfer it again to
the panel.
80001
The log specified is filled to the size defined
(in percent) and must be stored elsewhere.
Store the file or table by executing a ‘move’ or ‘copy’
function.
80002
A line is missing in the specified log.
—
80003
The copying process for logging was not successful.
In this case, it is advisable to check any subsequent
system alarms, too.
—
80006
Since logging is not possible, this causes a permanent In the case of databases, check whether the
loss of the functionality.
corresponding data source exists and start up the
system again.
80009
A copying action has been completed successfully.
—
80010
Since the storage location was incorrectly entered in
WinCC flexible, this causes a permanent loss of the
functionality.
Configure the storage location for the respective log
again and restart the system when the full functionality
is required.
80012
Log entries are stored in a buffer. If the values are
read to the buffer faster than they can be physically
written (using a hard disk, for example), overloading
may occur and recording is then stopped.
Archive fewer values.
Or:
Increase the logging cycle.
80013
The overload status no longer applies. Archiving
resumes the recording of all values.
—
80014
The same action was triggered twice in quick
succession. Since the process is already in operation,
the action is only carried out once.
—
80015
This system alarm is used to report DOS or database
errors to the user.
—
80016
The logs are separated by the system function
"CloseAllLogs" and the incoming entries exceed the
defined buffer size.
All entries in the buffer are deleted.
Reconnect the logs.
80017
The number of incoming events cause a buffer
overflow. his can be caused, for example, by several
copying actions being activated at the same time.
All copy jobs are deleted.
Stop the copy action.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
269
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
80019
The connection between WinCC flexible and all logs
were closed, for example, after executing the system
function "CloseAllLogs".
Entries are written to the buffer and are then written to
the logs when a connection is re-established.
There is no connection to the storage location and the
storage medium may be replaced, for example.
—
80020
The maximum number of simultaneously copy
operations has been exceeded. Copying is not
executed.
Wait until the current copying actions have been
completed, then restart the last copy action.
80021
An attempt was made to delete a log which is still busy Wait until the current copying actions have been
with a copy action. Deletion has not been executed.
completed, then restart the last action
80022
An attempt was made to start a sequence log, which is In the project, check
not a sequence log, from a log using the system
• if the "StartSequenceLog" system function was
function "StartSequenceLog". No sequence log file is
properly configured
created.
• if the tag parameters are properly provided with
data on the HMI device
80023
An attempt was made to copy a log to itself.
The log is not copied.
In the project, check
• if the "CopyLog" system function was properly
configured
• if the tag parameters are properly provided with
data on the HMI device
80024
The "CopyLog" system function does not allow
copying when the target log already contains data
("Mode" parameter). The log is not copied.
Edit the "CopyLog" system function in the project if
necessary. Before you initiate the system function,
delete the destination log file.
80025
You have canceled the copy operation.
Data written up to this point are retained. The
destination log file (if configured) is not deleted.
The cancellation is reported by an error entry
$RT_ERR$ at the end of the destination log.
—
80026
This alarm is output after all logs are initialized. Values —
are written to the logs from then on. Prior to this, no
entries are written to the logs, irrespective whether
WinCC flexible Runtime is active or not.
80027
The internal Flash memory has been specified as the
storage location for a log. This is not permissible.
No values are written to this log and the log file is not
created.
Configure "Storage Card" or a network path as the
storage location.
80028
The alarm returns a status report indicating that the
logs are currently being initialized. No values are
logged until the alarm 80026 is output.
—
80029
The number of logs specified in the alarm could not be Evaluate the additional system alarms , related to this
initialized. The logs are initialized.
alarm which is also generated.
The faulty log files are not available for logging jobs.
Check the configuration, the ODBC (Open Database
Connectivity) and the specified drive.
80030
The structure of the existing log file does not match
the expected structure.
Logging is stopped for this log.
Delete the existing log data manually, in advance.
80031
The log in CSV format is corrupted.
The log cannot be used.
Delete the faulty file.
270
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
80032
Logs can be assigned events. These are triggered as
soon as the log is full. If WinCC flexible Runtime is
started and the log is already full, the event is not
triggered.
The log specified no longer logs data because it is full.
Close WinCC flexible Runtime, delete the log, then
restart WinCC flexible Runtime.
Or:
Configure a button which contains the same actions as
the event and press it.
80033
"System Defined" is set in the data log file as the data
source name. This causes an error. No data is written
to the database logs, whereas the logging to the CSV
logs works.
Install MSDE again.
80034
An error has occurred in the initialization of the logs.
An attempt has been made to create the tables as a
backup. This action was successful. A backup has
been made of the tables of the corrupted log file and
the cleared log was restarted.
No action is necessary. However, it is recommended
to save the backup files or delete them in order to
make the space available again.
80035
An error has occurred in the initialization of the logs.
An attempt has been made to create backups of the
tables and this has failed. No logging or backup has
been performed.
It is recommended to save the backups or to delete
them in order to release memory.
80044
The export of a log was interrupted because Runtime
was closed or due to a power failure. When Runtime
restarted, it was detected that the export needed to be
resumed.
The export resumes automatically.
80045
The export of a log was interrupted due to an error in
the connection to the server or at the server itself.
The export is repeated automatically. Check:
• The connection to the server
• If the server is running
• If there is enough free space on the server
80046
The destination file could not be written while
exporting the log.
Check whether there is enough space on the server
and it you have permission to create the log file.
80047
The log could not be read while exporting it.
Check whether the storage medium is correctly
inserted.
80048
—
—
80049
The log could not be renamed while preparing to
export it.
The job can not be completed."
Check whether the storage medium is correctly
inserted and if there is sufficient space on the medium.
80050
The log which shall be exported is not closed.
The job can not be completed.
Make sure the "CloseAll Logs" system function is
called before using the "ExportLog" system function.
Change the configuration as required.
90024
No operator actions can be logged due to lack of
space on the storage medium for log. The operator
action will therefore not be executed.
Make more space available by inserting an empty
storage medium or swapping out the log files on the
server using "ExportLog".
90025
No user actions can be logged because of error state
of the archive. Therefore the user action will not be
executed.
Check whether the storage medium is correctly
inserted.
90026
No operator actions can be logged because the log is
closed. The operator action will therefore not be
executed.
Before further operator actions are carried out, the log
must be opened again using the system function
"OpenAllLogs". Change the configuration as required.
90029
Runtime was closed during ongoing operation
(perhaps due to a power failure) or a storage medium
in use is incompatible with Audit Trail. An Audit Trail is
not suitable if it belongs to another project or has
already been archived.
Ensure that you are using the correct storage medium.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
271
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
90030
Runtime was closed during ongoing operation
(perhaps due to a power failure).
—
90031
Runtime was closed during ongoing operation
(perhaps due to a power failure).
—
90032
Running out of space on the storage medium for log.
Make more space available by inserting an empty
storage medium or swapping out the log files on the
server using "ExportLog".
90033
No more space on the storage medium for log. As of
now, no more operator actions requiring logging will
be executed.
Make more space available by inserting an empty
storage medium or swapping out the log files on the
server using "ExportLog".
90040
Audit Trail is switched off because of a forced user
action.
Activate the "Audit Trail" again using the system
function "StartLog".
90041
A user action which has to be logged has been
executed without a logged on user.
A user action requiring logging should only be possible
with permission. Change the configuration by setting a
required authorization for the input object.
90044
A user action which has to be confirmed was blocked,
because there is another user action pending.
Repeat the user action if necessary.
110000
The operating mode was changed. "Offline" mode is
now set.
—
110001
The operating mode was changed. "Online" mode is
now set.
—
110002
The operating mode was not changed.
Check the connection to the PLCs.
Check whether the address area for the area pointer
88 “Coordination" in the PLC is available.
110003
The operating mode of the specified PLC was
changed by the system function
"SetConnectionMode".
The operating mode is now "offline".
—
110004
The operating mode of the specified PLC has been
changed by the system function
"SetConnectionMode".
The operating mode is now "online".
—
110005
An attempt was made to use the system function
Switch the complete system to "online" mode, then
SetConnectionMode to switch the specified PLC to
execute the system function again.
"online" mode, although the entire system is in "offline"
mode. This changeover is not allowed. The PLC
remains in "offline" mode.
110006
The content of the "project version" area pointer does
not match the user version configured in WinCC
flexible. WinCC flexible Runtime is therefore closed.
Check:
• The project version entered on the PLC
• The project version entered in WinCC flexible
120000
The trend is not displayed because you configured an
incorrect axis to the trend or an incorrect trend.
Change the configuration.
120001
The trend is not displayed because you configured an
incorrect axis to the trend or an incorrect trend.
Change the configuration.
120002
The trend is not displayed because the tag assigned
attempts to access an invalid PLC address.
Check whether the data area for the tag exists in the
PLC, the configured address is correct and the value
range for the tag is correct.
130000
The action was not executed.
Close all other programs.
Delete files no longer required from the hard disk.
130001
The action was not executed.
Delete files no longer required from the hard disk.
272
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
130002
The action was not executed.
Close all other programs.
Delete files no longer required from the hard disk.
130003
No data medium found. The operation is canceled.
Check, for example, if
• The correct data medium is being accessed
• The data medium is inserted
130004
The data medium is write-protected. The operation is
canceled.
Check whether access has been made to the correct
data carrier. Remove the write protection.
130005
The file is read only. The operation is canceled.
Check whether access has been made to the correct
file. Edit the file attributes if necessary.
130006
Access to file failed. The operation is canceled.
Check, for example, if
• The correct file is being accessed
• The file exists
• Another action is preventing simultaneous access
to the file
130007
The network connection is interrupted.
Records cannot be saved or read over the network
connection.
Check the network connection and eliminate the cause
of error.
130008
The storage card is not available.
Records cannot be saved to / read from the storage
card.
Insert the storage card.
130009
The specified folder does not exist on the storage
card.
Any files saved to this directory are not backed up
when you switch off the HMI device.
Insert the storage card.
130010
The maximum nesting depth can be exhausted when,
for example, a value change in a script results in the
call of another script and the second script in turn has
a value change that results in the call of yet a further
script etc.
The configured functionality is not supported.
Check the configuration.
140000
An online connection to the PLC is established.
—
140001
The online connection to the PLC was shut down.
—
140003
No tag updating or writing is executed.
Check the connection and if the PLC is switched on.
Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel
using "Set PG/PC interface".
Restart the system.
140004
No tag update or write operations are executed
because the access point or the module configuration
is faulty.
Verify the connection and check whether the PLC is
switched on.
Check the access point or the module configuration
(MPI, PPI, PROFIBUS) in the Control Panel with "Set
PG/PC interface".
Restart the system.
140005
No tag updating or writing is executed because the
HMI device address is incorrect (possibly too high).
Use a different HMI device address.
Verify the connection and check whether the PLC is
switched on.
Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel
using "Set PG/PC interface".
Restart the system.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
273
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
140006
No tag updating or writing is executed because the
baud rate is incorrect.
Select a different baud rate in WinCC flexible
(according to module, profile, communication peer,
etc.).
140007
Tag are not updated or written because the bus profile
is incorrect (see %1).
The following parameter could not be written to the
registry::
1: Tslot
2: Tqui
3: Tset
4: MinTsdr
5: MaxTsdr
6: Trdy
7: Tid1
8: Tid2
9: Gap Factor
10: Retry Limit
Check the user-defined bus profile.
Check the connection and if the PLC is switched on.
Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel
using "Set PG/PC interface".
Restart the system.
140008
No tag updating or writing is executed because baud
rate is incorrect. The following parameters could not
be written to the registry:
0: General error
1: Wrong version
2: Profile cannot be written to the registry.
3: The subnet type cannot be written to the registry.
4: The Target Rotation Time cannot be written to the
registry.
5: Faulty Highest Address (HSA).
Check the connection and if the PLC is switched on.
Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel
using "Set PG/PC interface".
Restart the system.
140009
Tags are not updated or written because the module
for S7 communication was not found.
Reinstall the module in the Control Panel using
"Set PG/PC interface".
140010
No S7 communication partner found because the PLC
is shut down.
DP/T:
The option “PG/PC is the only master” is not set in the
Control Panel under “Set PG/PC interface.”
Switch the PLC on.
DP/T:
If only one master is connected to the network, disable
"PG/PC is the only master" in "Set PG/PC interface".
If several masters are connected to the network,
enable these. Do not change any settings, for this will
cause bus errors.
140011
No tag updating or writing is executed because
communication is down.
Check the connection and that the communication
partner is switched on.
140012
There is an initialization problem (e.g. when WinCC
flexible Runtime was closed in Task Manager).
Or:
Another application (e.g.STEP7) with different bus
parameters is active and the driver cannot be started
with the new bus parameters (transmission rate, for
example).
Restart the HMI device.
Or:
Run WinCC flexible Runtime, then start your other
applications.
140013
The MPI cable is disconnected and, thus, there is no
power supply.
Check the connections.
140014
The configured bus address is in already in use by
another application.
Edit the HMI device address in the PLC configuration.
274
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
140015
Wrong transmission rate
Or:
Faulty bus parameters (e.g. HSA)
Or:
OP address > HSA or: Wrong interrupt vector
(interrupt does not arrive at the driver)
Correct the relevant parameters.
140016
The hardware does not support the configured
interrupt.
Change the interrupt number.
140017
The set interrupt is in use by another driver.
Change the interrupt number.
140018
The consistency check was disabled by SIMOTION
Scout. Only a corresponding note appears.
Enable the consistency check with SIMOTION Scout
and once again download the project to the PLC.
140019
SIMOTION Scout is downloading a new project to the
PLC. Connection to the PLC is canceled.
Wait until the end of the reconfiguration.
140020
The version in the PLC and that of the project
(FWX file) do not match.
Connection to the PLC is canceled
The following remedies are available:
Download the current version to the PLC using
SIMOTION Scout.
Regenerate the project using WinCC flexible ES, close
WinCC flexible Runtime and restart with a new
configuration.
150000
No more data is read or written. Possible causes:
• The cable is defective
• The PLC does not respond, is defective, etc.
• The wrong port is used for the connection
• System overload
150001
Connection is up because the cause of the interruption —
has been eliminated.
160000
No more data is read or written. Possible causes:
• The cable is defective
• The PLC does not respond, is defective, etc.
• The wrong port is used for the connection
• System overload
160001
Connection is up because the cause of the interruption —
has been eliminated.
160010
No connection to the server because the server
identification (CLS-ID) cannot be determined.
Values cannot be read or written.
Check access rights.
160011
No connection to the server because the server
identification (CLS-ID) cannot be determined.
Values cannot be read or written.
Check, for example, if
• The server name is correct
• The computer name is correct
• The server is registered
160012
No connection to the server because the server
identification (CLS-ID) cannot be determined.
Values cannot be read or written.
Check, for example, if
• The server name is correct
• The computer name is correct
• The server is registered
Ensure that the cable is plugged in, the PLC is
operational, the correct port is being used.
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
Ensure that the cable is plugged in, the PLC is
operational, the correct port is being used.
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
Note for advanced users:
Interpret the value from HRESULT.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
275
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
160013
The specified server was started as InProc server.
Configure the server as OutProc Server or Local
This has not been released and may possibly lead to
Server.
incorrect behavior because the server is running in the
same process area as the WinCC flexible Runtime
software.
160014
Only one OPC server project can be started on a
PC/MP. An alarm is output when an attempt is made
to start a second project.
The second project has no OPC server functionality
and cannot be located as an OPC server by external
sources.
Do not start a second project with OPC server
functionality on the computer.
170000
S7 diagnostics events are not indicated because it is
not possible to log on to the S7 diagnostics functions
at this device. The service is not supported.
—
170001
The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be viewed because
communication with the PLC is shut down.
Set the PLC to online mode.
170002
The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be viewed because
reading of the diagnostics buffer (SSL) was canceled
with error.
—
170003
An S7 diagnostics event cannot be visualized. The
system returns internal error %2.
—
170004
An S7 diagnostics event cannot be visualized. The
system returns an internal error of error class %2,
error number %3.
—
170007
It is not possible to read the S7 diagnostics buffer
(SSL) because this operation was canceled with an
internal error of class %2 and error code %3.
—
180000
A component/OCX received configuration data with a
version ID which is not supported.
Install a newer component.
180001
System overload because too many actions running in Several remedies are available:
parallel. Not all the actions can be executed, some are • Increase the configured cycle times or basic clock
rejected.
• Generate the alarms at a slower rate (polling)
• Initiate scripts and functions at greater intervals
If the alarm appears more frequently:
Restart the HMI device.
180002
The screen keyboard could not be activated. Possible
causes:
Reinstall WinCC flexible Runtime.
"TouchInputPC.exe" was not registered due to a faulty
Setup.
190000
It is possible that the tag is not updated.
190001
The tag is updated after the cause of the last error
—
state has been eliminated (return to normal operation).
190002
The tag is not updated because communication with
the PLC is down.
Select the system function "SetOnline" to go online.
190004
The tag is not updated because the configured tag
address does not exist.
Check the configuration.
190005
The tag is not updated because the configured PLC
type does not exist for this tag.
Check the configuration.
276
—
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
190006
The tag is not updated because it is not possible to
map the PLC type in the data type of the tag.
Check the configuration.
190007
The tag value is not modified because the connection
to the PLC is interrupted or the tag is offline.
Set online mode or reconnect to the PLC.
190008
The threshold values configured for the tag have been
violated, for example, by
• A value entered
• A system function
• A script
Observe the configured or current threshold values of
the tag.
190009
An attempt has been made to assign the tag a value
which is outside the permitted range of values for this
data type.
For example, a value of 260 was entered for a byte
tag or a value of -3 for an unsigned word tag.
Observe the range of values for the data type of the
tags.
190010
Too many values are written to the tag (for example, in Increase the time interval between multiple write
a loop triggered by a script).
actions.
Values are lost because only up to 100 actions are
saved to the buffer.
190011
Possible cause 1:
The value entered could not be written to the
configured PLC tag because the high or low limit was
exceeded.
Make sure that the value entered lies within the range
of values of the control tags.
The system discards the entry and restores the
original value.
Possible cause 2:
190012
The connection to the PLC was interrupted.
Check the connection to the PLC.
It is not possible to convert a value from a source
format to a target format, for example:
Check the range of values or the data type of the tags.
An attempt is being made to assign a value to a
counter that is outside the valid, PLC-specific value
range.
A tag of the type Integer should be assigned a value of
the type String.
190100
The area pointer is not updated because the address
configured for this pointer does not exist.
Type
1 Warning alarms
2 Error alarms
3 PLC acknowledgment
4 HMI device acknowledgment
5 LED mapping
6 Trend request
7 Trend transfer 1
8 Trend transfer 2
No.:
consecutive number shown in WinCC flexible ES.
Check the configuration.
190101
The area pointer is not updated because it is not
possible to map the PLC type to the area pointer type.
Parameter type and no.:
see alarm 190100
—
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
277
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
190102
The area pointer is updated after the cause of the last
error state has been eliminated (return to normal
operation). Parameter type and no.:
See alarm 190100
—
200000
Coordination is not executed because the address
configured in the PLC does not exist/is not set.
Change the address or set up the address in the PLC.
200001
Coordination is canceled because the write access to
the address configured in the PLC is not possible.
Change the address or set the address in the PLC at
an area which allows write access.
200002
Coordination is not carried out at the moment because Internal error
the address format of the area pointer does not match
the internal storage format.
200003
Coordination can be executed again because the last
error state is eliminated (return to normal operation).
—
200004
The coordination may not be executed.
—
200005
No more data is read or written. Possible causes:
• The cable is defective
• The PLC does not respond, is defective, etc.
• System overload
Ensure that the cable is plugged in and the PLC is
operational.
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
200100
Coordination is not executed because the address
configured in the PLC does not exist/is not set.
Change the address or set up the address in the PLC.
200101
Coordination is canceled because the write access to
the address configured in the PLC is not possible.
Change the address or set the address in the PLC at
an area which allows write access.
200102
Coordination is not carried out at the moment because Internal error
the address format of the area pointer does not match
the internal storage format.
200103
Coordination can be executed again because the last
error state is eliminated (return to normal operation).
—
200104
The coordination may not be executed.
—
200105
No more data is read or written. Possible causes:
• The cable is defective
• The PLC does not respond, is defective, etc.
• System overload
Ensure that the cable is plugged in and the PLC is
operational.
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
210000
Jobs are not processed because the address
configured in the PLC does not exist/has not been set
up.
Change the address or set up the address in the PLC.
210001
Jobs are not processed because read/write access to
the address configured in the PLC is not possible.
Change the address or set up the address in the PLC
in an area which allows read/write access.
210002
Jobs are not executed because the address format of
the area pointer does not match the internal storage
format.
Internal error
210003
The job buffer is processed again because the last
error status has been eliminated (return to normal
operation).
—
210004
It is possible that the job buffer will not be processed.
—
210005
A control request with an illegal number was initiated.
Check the PLC program.
210006
An error occurred while attempting to execute the
control request. As a result, the control request is not
executed. Observe the next/previous system alarms.
Check the parameters of the control request.
Recompile the configuration.
278
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
220001
The tag is not downloaded because the associated
communication driver / HMI device does not support
the download of Boolean/discrete data types.
Change the configuration.
220002
The tag is not downloaded because the associated
communication driver / HMI device does not support
write access to the data type BYTE.
Change the configuration.
220003
The communication driver cannot be loaded. The
driver may not be installed.
Install the driver by reinstalling WinCC flexible
Runtime.
220004
Communication is down and no update data is
transferred because the cable is not connected or
defective etc.
Check the connection.
220005
Communication is up.
—
220006
The connection between the specified PLC and the
specified port is active.
—
220007
The connection to the specified PLC is interrupted at
the specified port.
Check whether
• The cable is plugged in
• The PLC is OK
• The correct port is used
• Your configuration is OK (port parameters, protocol
settings, PLC address)
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
220008
The communication driver cannot access or open the
specified port. The port may be in use by another
application or the port used is not available on the
destination device.
There is no communication with the PLC.
Close all the applications which access this port and
restart the computer.
Use another port of the system.
230000
The value entered could not be accepted. The system
discards the entry and restores the previous value.
Either
• The value range has been exceeded
• Illegal characters have been entered
• The maximum permitted number of users has
been exceeded
Enter a practical value or delete any unneeded users.
230002
The currently logged in user has not the required
authorization. The system therefore discards the input
and restored the previous value.
Log on as a user with appropriate authorization.
230003
Changeover to the specified screen failed because the Configure the screen and check the screen selection
screen is not available/configured. The current screen function.
remains selected.
230005
The value range of the tag has been exceeded in the
I/O field.
The original value of the tag is retained.
Observe the range of values for the tag when entering
a value.
230100
During navigation in the web browser, the system
returned a message which may be of interest to the
user.
The web browser continues to run but may not (fully)
show the new page.
Navigate to another page.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
279
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
230200
The connection to the HTTP channel was interrupted
due to an error. This error is explained in detail by
another system alarm.
Data is no longer exchanged.
Check the network connection.
Check the server configuration.
230201
The connection to HTTP channel was established.
Data is exchanged.
—
230202
WININET.DLL has detected an error. This error
usually occurs when an attempt to connect to the
server fails or the server refuses to connect because
the client lacks the proper authorization.
An unknown server certificate may also be the cause if
the connection is encrypted by means of SSL.
The alarm text provides details.
This text is always in the language of the Windows
installation because it is returned by the Windows OS.
Process values are no longer exchanged.
Depending on the cause:
When an attempt to connect fails or a timeout error
occurs:
• Check the network connection and the network
• Check the server address
• Check whether the web server is actually running
on the destination computer
Faulty authorization:
• The configured user name and/or password do not
match those on the server. Establish consistency
When the server certificate is rejected:
Certificate signed by an unknown CA ( ):
• Either ignore this item in your project, or
• Install a certificate that has been signed with a root
certificate known to the client computer
If the date of certificate is invalid:
• Either ignore this item in your project, or
• Install a certificate with a valid date on the server
Invalid CN (Common Name or Computer Name):
• Either ignore this item in your project, or
• Install a certificate with a name that corresponds to
that of the server address
230203
Although a connection can be made to the server, the
HTTP server refuses to connect because
• WinCC flexible Runtime is not running on the
server, or
• The HTTP channel is not supported (503 Service
unavailable)
Error 503 Service unavailable: Check whether
• WinCC flexible Runtime is running on the server
• The HTTP channel is supported
Other errors can only occur if the web server does not
support the HTTP channel. The language of the alarm
text depends on the web server.
Data is not exchanged.
230301
An internal error has occurred. An English text
explains the error in more detail. This may be caused
by insufficient memory.
OCX does not work.
—
230302
The name of the remote server cannot be resolved.
The attempt to connect failed.
Check the configured server address.
Check whether the DNS service is available on the
network.
230303
The remote server is not running on the addressed
computer.
Wrong server address.
The attempt to connect failed
Check the configured server address.
Check whether the remote server is running on the
target computer.
280
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
230304
The remote server on the addressed computer is
incompatible to VNCOCX.
The attempt to connect failed.
Use a compatible remote server.
230305
The authentication has failed because the password is Configure the correct password.
incorrect.
The attempt to connect failed.
230306
Error in the connection to the remote server. This may
occur as a result of network problems.
The attempt to connect failed.
Check whether
• The bus cable is plugged in
• There are network problems
230307
The connection to the remote server was shut down
because
• The remote server was shut down, or
• The user instructed the server to close all
connections
—
The connection is closed.
230308
This alarm provides information on the connection
status.
An attempt is made to connect.
—
240000
WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo mode.
You have no authorization or your authorization is
corrupted.
Install the authorization.
240001
WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo mode.
Load an adequate authorization / powerpack.
Too many tags are configured for the installed version.
240002
WinCC flexible Runtime is operating with a timelimited emergency authorization.
Restore the full authorization.
240003
Authorization failed.
Without authorization, WinCC flexible Runtime will run
in demo mode.
Restart WinCC flexible Runtime or reinstall it.
240004
Error while reading the emergency authorization.
WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo mode.
Restart WinCC flexible Runtime, install the
authorization or repair the authorization (see
Commissioning Instructions Software Protection).
240005
The Automation License Manager has detected an
internal system fault.
Possible causes:
• A corrupt file
• A defective installation
• No free space for the Automation License
Manager etc.
Reboot the HMI device/PC. If this does not solve the
problem, remove the Automation License Manager
and install it again.
250000
The tag in the specified line in "Status force" is not
Check the set address and then verify that the address
updated because the address configured for this tag is is set up in the PLC.
not available.
250001
The tag in the specified line in "Status force" is not
updated because the PLC type configured for this tag
does not exist.
Check the set address.
250002
The tag in the specified line in "Status force" is not
updated because it is not possible to map the PLC
type in the tag type.
Check the set address.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
281
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
250003
An attempt to connect to the PLC failed. The tags are
not updated.
Check the connection to the PLC. Check that the PLC
is switched on and is online.
260000
An unknown user or an unknown password has been
entered in the system.
The current user is logged off from the system.
Log on to the system as a user with a valid password.
260001
The logged in user does not have sufficient
Log on to the system as a user with sufficient
authorization to execute the protected functions on the authorization.
system.
260002
This alarm is triggered by the system function
"TrackUserChange".
—
260003
The user has logged off from the system.
—
260004
The user name entered into the user view already
exists in the user management.
Select another user name because user names have
to be unique in the user management.
260005
The entry is discarded.
Use a shorter user name.
260006
The entry is discarded.
Use a shorter or longer password.
260007
The logon timeout value entered is outside the valid
range of 0 to 60 minutes.
The new value is discarded and the original value is
retained.
Enter a logon timeout value between 0 and 60
minutes.
260008
An attempt was made to read a PTProRun.pwl file
—
created with ProTool V 6.0 in WinCC flexible.
Reading the file was canceled due to incompatibility of
the format.
260009
You have attempted to delete the user "Admin" or
"PLC User". These users are fixed components of the
user management and cannot be deleted.
If you need to delete a user, because perhaps you
have exceeded the maximum number permitted,
delete another user.
260012
The passwords entered in the "Change Password"
dialog and the confirmation field are not identical.
The password has not been changed. User will be
logged off.
You have to log on to the system again. Then enter
the identical password twice to be able to change the
password.
260013
The password entered in the "Change Password"
dialog is invalid because it is already in use.
The password has not been changed. User will be
logged off.
You have to log on to the system again. Then enter a
new password that has not been used before.
260014
User has unsuccessfully attempted to log on 3 times in You can log on to the system with your correct
succession.
password. Only an administrator can change the
The user has been locked out and assigned to group
assignment to a group.
no. 0.
270000
A tag is not indicated in the alarm because it attempts
to access an invalid address in the PLC.
Check whether the data area for the tag exists in the
PLC, the configured address is correct and the value
range for the tag is correct.
270001
There is a device-specific limit as to how many alarms
may be queued for output (see the operating
instructions). This limit has been exceeded.
The view no longer contains all the alarms.
However, all alarms are written to the alarm buffer.
—
270002
The view shows alarms of a log for which there is no
data in the current project.
Wildcards are output for the alarms.
Delete older log data if necessary.
282
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
270003
The service cannot be set up because too many
devices want to use this service.
A maximum of four devices may execute this action.
Reduce the number of HMI devices which want to use
the service.
270004
Access to persistent buffer is not possible. Alarms
cannot be restored or saved.
If the problems persist at the next startup, contact
Customer Support (delete Flash).
270005
Persistent buffer damaged: Alarms cannot be
restored.
If the problems persist at the next startup, contact
Customer Support (delete Flash).
270006
Project modified: Alarms cannot be restored from the
persistent buffer.
The project was generated and transferred new to the
HMI device; The error should no longer occur when
the device starts again.
270007
A configuration problem is preventing the restore (a
DLL is missing, a directory is unknown, etc.).
Update the operating system and then transfer your
project again to the HMI device.
280000
Connection is up because the cause of the interruption —
has been eliminated.
280001
No more data is read or written. Possible causes:
• The cable is defective
• The PLC does not respond, is defective, etc.
• The wrong port is used for the connection
• System overload
Check whether
• The cable is plugged in
• The PLC is OK
• The correct port is used
280002
The connection used requires a function block in the
PLC.
The function block has responded. Communication is
now enabled.
—
280003
The connection used requires a function block in the
PLC.
The function block has not responded.
Check whether
• The cable is plugged in
• The PLC is OK
• The correct port is used
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
Remedy depends on the error code:
1: The function block must set the COM bit in the
response container.
2: The function block must not set the ERROR bit in
the response container.
3: The function block must respond within the
specified time (timeout).
4: Go online to the PLC.
280004
The connection to the PLC is interrupted. There is no
data exchange at present.
Check the connection parameters in WinCC flexible.
Ensure that the cable is plugged in, the PLC is
operational, the correct port is being used.
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
290000
The recipe tag could not be read or written. It is
assigned the start value.
The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up to
four more failed tags if necessary. After that, alarm
290003 is output.
Check in the configuration that the address has been
set up in the PLC.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
283
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
290001
An attempt has been made to assign a value to a
recipe tag which is outside the value range permitted
for this type.
The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up to
four more failed tags if necessary. After that, alarm
290004 is output.
Observe the value range for the tag type.
290002
It is not possible to convert a value from a source
format to a target format.
The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up to
four more failed recipe tags if necessary. After that,
alarm 290005 is output.
Check the value range or type of the tag.
290003
This alarm is output when alarm number 290000 is
Check in the configuration that the tag addresses have
triggered more than five times.
been set up in the PLC.
In this case, no further separate alarms are generated.
290004
This alarm is output when alarm number 290001 is
Observe the value range for the tag type.
triggered more than five times.
In this case, no further separate alarms are generated.
290005
This alarm is output when alarm number 290002 is
Check the value range or type of the tag.
triggered more than five times.
In this case, no further separate alarms are generated.
290006
The threshold values configured for the tag have been
violated by values entered.
Observe the configured or current threshold values of
the tag.
290007
There is a difference between the source and target
structure of the recipe currently being processed. The
target structure contains an additional data recipe tag
which is not available in the source structure.
The data recipe tag specified is assigned its start
value.
Insert the specified data recipe tag in the source
structure.
290008
There is a difference between the source and target
Remove the specified data recipe tag in the specified
structure of the recipe currently being processed. The recipe from the project.
source structure contains an additional data recipe tag
which is not available in the target structure and
therefore cannot be assigned.
The value is rejected.
290010
The storage location configured for the recipe is not
permitted.
Possible causes:
Illegal characters, write protection, data carrier out of
space or does not exist.
Check the configured storage location.
290011
The record with the specified number does not exist.
Check the source for the number (constant or tag
value)
290012
The recipe with the specified number does not exist.
Check the source for the number (constant or tag
value)
290013
An attempt was made to save a record under a record
number which already exists.
The action is not executed.
The following remedies are available:
• Check the source for the number (constant or tag
value)
• First, delete the record
• Change the "Overwrite" function parameter
290014
The file specified to be imported could not be found.
Check:
• The file name
• Ensure that the file is in the specified directory
284
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
290020
Alarm reporting that the download of records from the
HMI device to the PLC has started.
—
290021
Alarm reporting that the download of records from the
HMI device to the PLC was completed.
—
290022
Alarm reporting that the download of records from the
HMI device to the PLC was canceled due to an error.
Check in the configuration whether:
• The tag addresses are configured in the PLC
• The recipe number exists
• The record number exist
• The "Overwrite" function parameter is set
290023
Alarm reporting that the download of records from the
PLC to the HMI device has started.
—
290024
Alarm reporting that the download of records from the
PLC to the HMI device was completed.
—
290025
Alarm reporting that the download of records from the
PLC to the HMI device was canceled due to an error.
Check in the configuration whether:
• The tag addresses are configured in the PLC
• The recipe number exists
• The record number exist
• The "Overwrite" function parameter is set
290026
An attempt has been made to read/write a record
although the record is not free at present.
This error may occur in the case of recipes for which
downloading with synchronization has been
configured.
Set the record status to zero.
290027
Unable to connect to the PLC at present. As a result,
the record can neither be read nor written.
Possible causes:
No physical connection to the PLC (no cable plugged
in, cable is defect) or the PLC is switched off.
Check the connection to the PLC.
290030
This alarm is output after you selected screen which
contains a recipe view in which a record is already
selected.
Reload the record from the storage location or retain
the current values.
290031
While saving, it was detected that a record with the
specified number already exists.
Overwrite the record or cancel the action.
290032
While exporting records it was detected that a file with
the specified name already exists.
Overwrite the file or cancel the process.
290033
Confirmation request before deleting records.
—
290040
A record error with error code %1 that cannot be
described in more detail occurred.
The action is canceled.
It is possible that the record was not installed correctly
on the PLC.
Check the storage location, the record, the "Data
record" area pointer and if necessary, the connection
to the PLC.
Restart the action after a short time.
If the error persists, contact Customer Support.
Forward the relevant error code to Customer Support.
290041
A record or file cannot be saved because the storage
location is full.
Delete files no longer required.
290042
An attempt was made to execute several recipe
actions simultaneously. The last action was not
executed.
Trigger the action again after waiting a short period.
290043
Confirmation request before storing records.
—
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
285
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
The data store for the recipe has been destroyed and
is deleted.
—
290050
Alarm reporting that the export of records has started.
—
290051
Alarm reporting that the export of records was
completed.
—
290052
Alarm reporting that the export of records was
canceled due to an error.
Ensure that the structure of the records at the storage
location and the current recipe structure on the HMI
device are identical.
290053
Alarm reporting that the import of records has started.
—
290054
Alarm reporting that the import of records was
completed.
—
290055
Alarm reporting that the import of records was
canceled due to an error.
Ensure that the structure of the records at the storage
location and the current recipe structure on the HMI
device are identical.
290056
Error when reading/writing the value in the specified
line/column.
The action was canceled.
Check the specified line/column.
290057
The tags of the recipe specified were toggled from
—
"offline" to "online" mode.
Each change of a tag in this recipe is now immediately
downloaded to the PLC.
290058
The tags of the specified recipe were toggled from
"offline" to "online" mode.
Modifications to tags in this recipe are no longer
immediately transferred to the PLC but must be
transferred there explicitly by downloading a record.
—
290059
Alarm reporting that the specified record was saved.
—
290060
Alarm reporting that the specified record memory was
cleared.
—
290061
Alarm reporting that clearing of record memory was
canceled due to an error.
—
290062
The record number is above the maximum of 65536.
This record cannot be created.
Select another number.
290063
This occurs with the system function
"ExportDataRecords" when the parameter "Overwrite"
is set to No.
An attempt has been made to save a recipe under a
file name which already exists.
The export is canceled.
Check the "ExportDataRecords" system function.
290064
Alarm reporting that the deletion of records has
started.
—
290065
Alarm reporting that the deletion of records has
successfully completed.
—
290066
Confirmation request before deleting records.
—
290068
Security request to confirm if all records in the recipe
should be deleted.
—
290069
Security request to confirm if all records in the recipe
should be deleted.
—
290070
The record specified is not in the import file.
Check the source of the record number or record
name (constant or tag value).
290044
286
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
290071
During the editing of record values, a value was
Enter a value within the limits of the recipe tag.
entered which exceeded the low limit of the recipe tag.
The entry is discarded.
290072
When editing record values, a value was entered
which exceeds the high limit of the recipe tag.
The entry is discarded.
Enter a value within the limits of the recipe tag.
290073
An action (e.g. saving a record) failed due to an
unknown error.
The error corresponds to the status alarm
IDS_OUT_CMD_EXE_ERR in the large recipe view.
—
290074
While saving, it was detected that a record with the
specified number already exists but under another
name.
Overwrite the record, change the record number or
cancel the action.
290075
A record with this name already exists.
The record is not saved.
Please select a different record name.
300000
Faulty configuration of process monitoring (e.g. using
PDiag or S7-Graph): More alarms are queued than
specified in the specifications of the CPU. No further
ALARM_S alarms can be managed by the PLC and
reported to the HMI devices.
Change the PLC configuration.
300001
ALARM_S is not registered on this PLC.
Select a PLC that supports the ALARM_S service.
310000
An attempt is being made to print too many reports in Wait until the previous active log was printed.
parallel.
Repeat the print job if necessary.
Only one log file can be output to the printer at a given
time; the print job is therefore rejected.
310001
An error occurred on triggering the printer. The report
is either not printed or printed with errors.
Evaluate the additional system alarms related to this
alarm.
Repeat the print job if necessary.
320000
The movements have already been indicated by
another device.
The movements can no longer be controlled.
Deselect the movements on the other display units
and select the motion control screen on the required
display unit.
320001
The network is too complex.
The faulty addresses cannot be indicated.
View the network in STL.
320002
No diagnostics alarm selected.
The unit belonging to the alarm could not be selected.
Select a diagnostics alarm from the ZP_ALARM alarm
screen.
320003
No alarms exists for the selected unit. The detail view
cannot visualize any networks.
Select the defective unit from the overview screen.
320004
The required signal states could not be read by the
PLC. The faulty addresses cannot be found.
Check the consistency between the configuration on
the display unit and the PLC program.
320005
The project contains ProAgent elements which are not In order to run the project, install the optional ProAgent
installed. ProAgent diagnostic functions cannot be
package.
performed.
320006
You have attempted to execute a function which is not
supported in the current constellation.
Check the type of the selected unit.
320007
No error-triggering addresses were found on the
networks.
ProAgent cannot indicate any faulty addresses.
Switch the detail screen to STL layout mode and
check the status of the addresses and exclusion
addresses.
320008
The diagnostic data stored in the configuration are not
synchronized with those in the PLC.
ProAgent can only indicate the diagnostic units.
Transfer the project to the HMI device again.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
287
Appendix
A.2 System alarms
Number
Effect/cause
Remedy
320009
The diagnostic data stored in the configuration are not
synchronized with those in the PLC. The diagnostic
screens can be operated as usual.
ProAgent may be unable to show all diagnostic texts.
Transfer the project to the HMI device again.
320010
The diagnostic data stored in the configuration are not
synchronized with those in STEP7.
The ProAgent diagnostics data is not up-to-date.
Transfer the project to the HMI device again.
320011
A unit with the corresponding DB number and FB
number does not exist.
The function cannot be executed.
Check the parameters of the "SelectUnit" function and
the units selected in the project.
320012
The "Step sequence mode" dialog is no longer
supported.
Use the ZP_STEP step sequence screen from the
corresponding standard project for your project.
Instead of calling the Overview_Step_Sequence_Mode
function, call the "FixedScreenSelection" function
using ZP_STEP as the screen name.
320014
The selected PLC cannot be evaluated for ProAgent.
The Alarm view assigned to the
"EvaluateAlarmDisplayFault" system function could
not be found.
Check the parameters of the
"EvaluateAlarmDisplayFault" system function.
330022
Too many dialogs are open on the HMI device.
Close all dialogs you do not require on the HMI device.
288
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
B
Abbreviations
ANSI
American National Standards Institution
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CSV
Comma Separated Values
CTS
Clear To Send
DC
Direct Current
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIL
Dual-in-Line (electronic chip housing design)
DNS
Domain Name System
DP
Distributed I/O
DSN
Data Source Name
DSR
Data Set Ready
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
IO
Input and Output
ESD
Components and modules endangered by electrostatic discharge
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EN
European standard
ES
Engineering System
ESD
Components and modules endangered by electrostatic discharge
GND
Ground
HF
High Frequency
HMI
Human Machine Interface
IEC
International Electronic Commission
IF
Interface
IP
Internet Protocol
LED
Light Emitting Diode
MAC
Media Access Control
MOS
Metal Oxide Semiconductor
MPI
Multipoint Interface (SIMATIC S7)
MS
Microsoft
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures
n. c.
Not connected
OP
Operator Panel
PC
Personal Computer
PG
Programming device
PPI
Point-to-Point Interface (SIMATIC S7)
RAM
Random Access Memory
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
289
Abbreviations
290
PELV
Protective Extra Low Voltage
RJ45
Registered Jack Type 45
RTS
Request to send
RxD
Receive Data
SD Card
Security Digital Card
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage
SP
Service Pack
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
STN
Super Twisted Nematic
Sub-D
Subminiature D (plug)
TAB
Tabulator
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TFT
Thin Film Transistor
TTY
Teletype
TxD
Transmit Data
UL
Underwriter’s Laboratory
USB
Universal Serial Bus
WINS
Windows Internet Naming Service
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Glossary
Acknowledge
Acknowledgment of an alarm confirms that it has been noted.
Alarm logging
Output of user-specific alarms to a printer, in parallel to their output to the HMI device
screen.
Alarm, acknowledgment
Acknowledgment of an alarm confirms that it has been noted.
Alarm, activated
Moment at which an alarm is triggered by the PLC or HMI device.
Alarm, deactivated
Moment at which the initiation of an alarm is reset by the PLC.
Alarm, user-specific
A user-specific alarm report specific operating states of a plant interconnected to the HMI
device via the PLC.
Automation device
An automation device is a PLC of the SIMATIC S5 series, for example the AG S5-115U
Automation system
An automation system is a PLC of the SIMATIC S7 series, for example SIMATIC S7-300
Boot loader
The boot loader is used to start the operating system and is started automatically after power
on of the HMI device. The loader is displayed after the operating system has loaded.
Configuration PC
A configuration PC is a programming device or PC on which plant projects are created using
an engineering software.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
291
Glossary
Configuration software
Configuration software is used to create projects used for the purpose of process
visualization. WinCC flexible is such a configuration software, for example.
Controller
PLC is a general term for devices and systems with which the HMI device communicates,
e.g. SIMATIC S7.
Degree of protection
The degree of protection specifies a standard of electronic equipment for a variety of
environmental conditions – and the protection of humans against potential danger when
using this equipment.
The degree of protection classified by IP differs from the protection class. But both involve
protection against touching dangerous electric voltage. The degree of protection also
classifies the protection of equipment against dirt and moisture.
Display duration
Defines whether a system alarm is displayed on the HMI device and the duration of the
display.
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) refers to a usually desirable state, in which technical
equipment does not disturb one another with unwanted electrical or electromagnetic effects.
Electromagnetic compatibility deals with technical and regulatory questions of undesired,
mutual influence in electrical engineering.
Event
Functions are triggered by defined incoming events. Events can be configured. Events which
can be assigned to a button include "Press" and "Release", for example.
Field
Area reserved in configured screens for the input and output of values.
Flash memory
Flash memory is a non-volatile memory with EEPROM chips that is implemented either as
mobile storage medium, or as permanently installed memory module on the motherboard.
Function keys
Function keys on the HMI device can be assigned user-specific functions. The functions
assigned to these keys are defined during configuration. The assignment of the function keys
may be specific to an active screen or independent of it.
292
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Glossary
Half Brightness Life Time
Time period after which brightness is reduced to 50% of the original value. The specified
value depends on the operating temperature.
Hardcopy
Output of the screen content to a printer.
HMI device
An HMI device is a device used for the operation and monitoring of machines and plants.
The machine or plant states are visualized on the HMI device by means of graphic objects or
signal lamps. The operator controls of the HMI device allow the operator to interact with the
processes of the machine or plant.
HMI device image
The HMI device image is a file that can be transferred from the configuration PC to the HMI
device. The HMI device image contains the operating system for the HMI device and the
elements of the runtime software required to run a project.
I/O field
An I/O field enables the input or output of values on the HMI device which are transferred to
the PLC.
Info text
An infotext is a configured information on objects within a project. Infotext for an alarm, for
example, may contain information on the cause of the fault and troubleshooting routines.
Object
An object is a project element such as a screen or an alarm. Objects are used to view or
enter texts and values on the HMI device.
Operator control
An operator control is a component of a project used to enter values and trigger functions. A
button, for example, is an operator control.
Plant
General term referring to machines, processing centers, systems, plants and processes
which are operated and monitored on an HMI device.
PLC job
A PLC job triggers a function for the PLC on the HMI device.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
293
Glossary
Process visualization
Process visualization is the representation of technical processes by means of text and
graphic elements. Configured plant screens allow operator intervention in active plant
processes using the input and output data.
Project
A project is the result of a configuration using a configuration software. The project normally
contains several screens with embedded system-specific objects, basic settings and alarms.
A project configured in WinCC flexible is saved to a project file with the extension *.hmi.
You need to distinguish between a project on the configuration PC and an executable project
on an HMI device. A project on the configuration PC can be available in more languages
than can be managed on the HMI device. The project on the configuration PC can also be
set up for different HMI devices. You can only transfer an executable project to an HMI
device if it has been especially compiled for it.
Project file
A project file is a file from which the executable project file for use on the HMI device is
generated. The project file is usually not transferred and is retained on the configuration PC.
The file name extension of a project file is *.hmi.
Project file, compressed
Compressed format of the project file. The compressed project file can be transferred in
addition to the executable project file to the corresponding HMI device. For this purpose,
backtransfer must be enabled in the project on the configuration PC. The compressed
project file is usually saved to an external memory card.
A compressed project file has the extension *.pdz.
Project file, executable
An executable project file is the file generated from the project file for a specific HMI device.
The executable project file is transferred to the associated HMI device where it is used to
operate and monitor plants.
An executable project file has the extension "*.fwx".
Protection class
The protection class is used in electrical engineering to classify and identify electrical
equipment in relation to existing safety measures designed to prevent electric shock.
There are four protection classes for electrical equipment.
Recipe
A recipe is a combination of tags that form a fixed data structure. The configured data
structure can be assigned data in the configuration software or on the HMI device and is
then referred to as a record. The use of recipes ensures that all data assigned to a data
record is transferred synchronously to the PLC.
294
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Glossary
Runtime software
The runtime software is a process visualization software used to test a project on a
configuration PC.
Screen
A screen is a form of visualization for all logically related process data in a plant. The
representation of the process data can be visually supported by graphic objects.
Screen object
A screen object refers to objects such as rectangles, I/O fields, or alarm views which are
configured for visualization or operation of the plant.
STEP 7
STEP 7 is the programming software for SIMATIC S7, SIMATIC C7 and SIMATIC WinAC
PLCs.
STEP 7 Micro/WIN
STEP 7 Micro/WIN is the programming software for SIMATIC S7-200 PLCs.
Symbolic I/O field
A symbolic I/O field is a field for the input and output of a value. Contains a list of default
entries from which one can be selected.
System alarm
A system alarm is assigned to the "System" alarm class. A system alarm refers to internal
states on the HMI device and the PLC.
Tab order
The tab order defined in the course of project engineering determines the sequence for
activating objects by pressing the <TAB> key.
Tag
A tag is a defined memory location to which values can be written and from which values can
be read. This can be done from the PLC or the HMI device. We distinguish between external
tags (process tags) and internal tags, depending on whether or not the tag is interconnected
with the PLC.
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
295
Glossary
Transfer
Transfer of a runtime project from the configuration PC to the HMI device.
"Transfer" mode
The "Transfer" operating mode is an operating mode of the HMI device in which an
executable project is transferred from the configuration PC to an HMI device.
WinAC MP
WinAC is a software PLC for multifunctional platforms.
296
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Index
/
/Audit, 28
A
ACK, 211
ACK key, 175
Acknowledge
Alarm, 175, 215
Error alarm, 215
Acknowledge key, 175
Acoustic feedback, 163
Acoustic signal
Inadvertent operation, 163
Acoustics
Feedback, 103
Activate
Password protection, 94
Address assignment
TCP/IP network, 122
Addressing, 120
Admin, 206, 207, 208
Alarm, 209
Acknowledge, 175, 215
Display, 212
Editing, 216
Functional scope, 26
Alarm buffer, 210
Functional scope, 26
Alarm class, 210, 213
Alarm event, 209
Alarm group, 210
Alarm indicator, 211
Alarm line, 212
Alarm log, 210
Alarm report, 210
Alarm view, 212
Extended, 213
Simple, 212
Alarm window, 214
ALARM_S, 26
Alphanumerical
Key assignment, 87, 175
Screen keyboard, 170
Alphanumerical value
Changing, 171, 179
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Entering, 171, 179
ALT key, 87, 175
Applications
MP 277, 13
Approval for Australia, 33
Approvals, 32
Audible signal, 169
Authorization, 197
Automatic
Transfer, 142
A-Z key, 87, 175
B
Backing up, 140, 146, 147, 149, 198
Registry information, 80
Registry Information, 98
Temporary files, 98
To memory card, 79
With ProSave, 149
With WinCC flexible, 147
Backlighting
Reducing, 100
Setting, 80
Backspace key, 86, 175
Backtransfer, 141, 144
Backup, 79, 133
to external storage device, 131
Bar, 182
Booting, 105
Bottom view, 14, 16, 18, 20
Brightness
Changing, 99
Browser
Home page, 79
Setting, 79
Bus connection, 29
Bus parameters
Profile, 114
C
Cable
Connecting, 49
Calibrating
Touch screen, 92
Cancel
Secure mode, 77
297
Index
Cancel key, 86, 175
Care, 247
CE approval, 32
Certificate
Delete, 129
Deleting, 79
Displaying, 79
Importing, 79, 129
Certificates, 79
Changing
Brightness, 99
User data, 206, 207
Character repeat, 79
Screen keyboard, 89
Charge
Electrostatic, 263
Clamping frame, 24
Clean screen, 248
Clearance
MP 277, 43
Climatic
Shipping conditions, 37
Storage conditions, 37
Closing
Project, 208
Column sequence
Alarm view, 213
Compatibility conflict, 146
Computer name
Setting, 80
Condensation, 37
Conductor cross-section, 53
Equipotential bonding, 51
Configuration graphic
Configuration PC, 58
Controller, 55
Equipotential bonding, 52
Power supply, 53
Printer, 62
Configuration PC
Configuration graphic, 58
Connecting, 58
Configuration phase, 137
Configure
Network, 120
Configuring
Data channel, 80, 115
Operating system, 73
PC/PPI cable, 59
RS-422/RS-485 interface, 57
Screen keyboard, 79, 88
Configuring PC, 137
Connecting
298
Configuration PC, 58
Controller, 55
Equipotential bonding, 51
Mains terminal, 54
Power supply, 53, 54
Printer, 62
PROFINET, 56, 58
USB device, 61
Connection, 29
Connection sequence, 49
Connections to PLCs
Number, 29
Contact person, 5
Control cabinet
Working on, 31
Control keys
Keyboard unit, 85
Control Panel
MPI, 113
Open, 79
Operating, 82, 84
Password protection, 75
PROFIBUS, 113
Screen keyboard, 82
Controller
Configuration graphic, 55
Configuring the interface, 57
Connecting, 55
Conventions, 4
Converter RS 422-RS 232, 23
Cookies, 128
Creating
Recipe data record, 227, 237
Users, 203
CTRL key, 87, 175
Currency, 80
Cursor key, 86, 174
D
Data channel
Configuring, 80, 115
Enabling, 115
Locking, 115
Data flow, 221
Date, 79
Entering, 172, 180
Setting, 95
Synchronizing, 96
Date format, 80, 97
Date/time properties, 79, 95
Deactivating
Password protection, 95
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Index
Decimal, 168
Default gateway, 122
Degree of protection, 42
Protection against ingress of solid foreign
bodies, 44
Protection against water, 44
Delay time
Setting, 80, 108
Delete
Certificate, 129
Recipe data record, 230, 239
Users, 208
Delete key, 86, 175
Device name
For network operation, 121
DHCP, 122
DIP switch
Setting, 57
Direct key, 164
Functional scope, 28
Direct keys
Assignment, 258
Display
Alarm, 212
MP 277 Key, 256
MP 277 Touch, 255
Display format, 178
Displaying
Certificate, 79
HMI device information, 80
Info text, 173, 181
Information on the MP 277, 106
UPS status, 80
Disposal, 5
Disturbance
Pulse-shaped, 35
Sinusoidal, 36
DNS, 122
DNS
Server, 120
Documentation
Additional, 5
Enclosed, 45
Double-click, 79
Setting, 91
Drop down list box
Open, 175
E
EC Declaration of Conformity, 32
Editing
Alarm, 216
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Recipe data record, 229, 238
Elbow adapter, 23
Electrical
Safe separation, 54
Electrical potential difference, 51
Electrostatic charge, 263
Element list, 223, 235
E-mail
Set, function overview, 80
Setting, 125
EMC directive, 32
Emission, 34, 36
Encryption, 128
END key, 86, 174
Enhanced recipe view, 222
Enter key, 86, 174
ENTER key, 86, 174
Entering
Alphanumerical value, 171, 179
Date, 172, 180
Key combination, 87, 175
Numerical value, 169, 178
Recipe data record, 244
Symbolic value, 172
Text box, 167
Time, 172, 180
Entry on the HMI device
By means of function key, 177
Using operating elements, 161
Environmental conditions
Climatic, 40
Mechanical, 39
Test, 40
Equipotential bonding
Cable, 52
Configuration graphic, 52
Connecting, 51
Requirements, 51
Equipotential bonding rail, 52
Error alarm
Acknowledge, 215
ESC key, 86, 175
ESD
Short description, 263
Ethernet settings
IP address, 122
Exporting
Recipe data record, 242
Extended alarm view, 213
Extended user view, 199
External
Keyboard, 81
Mouse, 81
299
Index
F
Feedback
Acoustic, 103, 163
Optical, 162
Fixation, 22
FM approval, 33
Fn key, 87, 175
Front view, 14, 16, 18, 20
Function
Additional, 28
Function key
Labeling, 69
Function keys
Global assignment, 177
Local assignment, 177
Function test, 64
Functional scope
Alarm buffer, 26
ALARM_S, 26
Graphics list, 26
Info text, 28
Limit monitoring, 26
Log, 27
Messages, 26
Recipe, 27
Safety, 27
Scaling, 26
Screen, 26
Tag, 26
Text list, 26
G
Gauge, 182
Graphics list
Functional scope, 26
Group acknowledgement, 175
H
High frequency radiation, 31
HMI device
Cold restart, 105
EMC-compatible installation, 35
Information, 80
Interfaces, 50
Restarting, 80
Shutting down, 64
Specifications, 255, 256
Switching on, 63
Testing, 63
300
HMI Input Panel
Options, 88
HOME key, 86, 174
Home page
Internet, 126
Host cable
Safety instruction, 60
I
Identification, 124
Importing
Certificate, 79, 129
Recipe data record, 243
Inadvertent operation
Acoustic signal, 163
Info text
Displaying, 173, 181
Functional scope, 28
Information
Additional, 5
For the HMI device, 106
Infotext
Key, 176
LED, 176, 214
Initial startup, 137
Input device
MP 277 Key, 257
MP 277 Touch, 255
Input Panel, 79
Installation as intended, 32
Installing
Option, 140, 155, 157
Instructions
General, 34
Insulation test
Test voltage, 44
Interfaces
MP 277, 50
Rated load, 61
Internet
Home page, 126
Options, 79
Search engine, 126
Security settings, 79
Service, 5
Settings, 125
Settings, overview of functions, 80
Internet options
Privacy, 128
IP address
Ethernet, 122
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Index
K
Key
ACK, 175
ALT, 87, 175
A-Z, 87, 175
Backspace, 175
Cancel, 86
CTRL, 87, 175
Cursor, 86, 174
Delete, 86, 175
END, 86, 174
ENTER, 86, 174
ESC, 86, 175
Fn, 87, 175
HOME, 86, 174
Infotext, 176
Scroll back, 86, 174
Scroll forward, 86, 174
SHIFT, 87, 175
TAB, 86, 174
Tabulator, 86
Key combination
Entering, 87, 175
Key control, 174, 177
Trend view, 188
Keyboard
External, 81
Safety instruction, 66
Keyboard properties, 79
Knowledge
Required, 3
L
Labeling
Approvals, 33
EC Declaration of Conformity, 32
Function key, 69
Labeling strips
Attaching, 71
Dimensions, 70
Printing, 69
LAN connection, 79
Language switching
Functional scope, 28
Layout
Slider control, 184
[email protected] view, 193
Trend view, 186
LED
Infotext, 176, 214
Memory information, 107
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
System information, 107
LED ACK, 211
License key
Transferring, 140, 159
Transferring back, 140, 160
Limit monitoring
Functional scope, 26
Limit test, 168
Limit value
For password, 198
For user, 198
For user view, 198
Limit value test, 178
Loader, 73
Operating, 74
Locking
Operating element, 248
Log
Functional scope, 27
Logoff
Users, 201
Logoff time, 197
Logon
Users, 200
Logon data, 124
M
Main dimensions
MP 277 10" Touch, 252, 253
MP 277 8" Key, 251
MP 277 8" Touch, 249, 250
Mains terminal
Connecting, 54
Maintenance, 247
Manual
Production sequence, 245
Transfer, 141
Mechanical
Shipping conditions, 37
Storage conditions, 37
Memory
MP 277 Key, 257
MP 277 Touch, 255
Memory card, 24
First use, 131
Inserting, 67
Restoring file system, 98
Unplug, 68
Memory information
LED, 107
Memory management, 80, 136
301
Index
Menu command
Simple recipe view, 236
Monitoring mode
[email protected] view, 193
Mounting
EMC-compatible, 35
Mounting clamp, 47, 48
Mounting clamp, 22
Mounting, 47, 48
Mounting cut-out
Dimensions, 43
Preparing, 43
Mounting location, 42
Mounting position, 41
Mouse
External, 81
Mouse properties, 79
MP 277
Applications, 13
Clearance, 43
Displaying information, 106
Interfaces, 50
Mounting, 46
Operator control, 65
Switching on, 63
Testing, 63
MP 277 10" Key
Bottom view, 20
Front view, 20
Overall dimensions, 254
Rear view, 21
Side view, 20
MP 277 10" Touch
Bottom view, 18
Front view, 18
Main dimensions, 252, 253
Rear view, 19
Side view, 18
MP 277 8" Key
Bottom view, 16
Front view, 16
Main dimensions, 251
Rear view, 17
Side view, 16
MP 277 8" Touch
Bottom view, 14
Front view, 14
Main dimensions, 249, 250
Rear view, 15
Side view, 14
MP 277 Key
Specifications, 256
302
MPI
Setting, 80, 113
Multi-key operation, 162, 176
Multimedia card, 67
N
Name server, 122
Network
Configure, 120
Logon data, 79
Set up, 119
Setting, 122
Network & dial-up connections, 79
Network ID, 79
Network operation
Device name, 121
Options, 80, 125
Nominal voltage, 44
Non-isolated plant configuration, 54
Notice of protected rights, 4
Number format, 80, 97
Numerical
Key assignment, 87, 175
Screen keyboard, 167
Numerical value
Changing, 169, 178
Decimal places, 168
Display format, 178
Entering, 169, 178
Limit test, 168
Limit value test, 178
O
Office location, 5
Offline
Operating mode, 138
Recipe tag, 226
Test, 145
Online
Operating mode, 138
Recipe tag, 226
Test, 145
OP properties, 80
Device, 106
Memory monitoring, 136
Persistent storage, 98
Touch, 92
OPC server, 13, 28
Open
Control Panel, 79
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Index
Drop down list box, 175
Selection list, 86
Operating
Control Panel, 82
Feedback, 162
Key, 174, 177
Loader, 74
Operating element, 174
Operator control, 86
Project, 161
Recipe screen, 227, 237
Slider control, 184
Switches, 183
Trend view, 187
With external keyboard, 162
With external mouse, 162
Operating element
Locking, 248
Operating, 174
Recipe view, 227
Simple recipe view, 235
Operating instructions
Purpose, 3
Scope, 3
Operating mode, 138
Changing, 138
Offline, 138
Online, 138
Transfer, 63, 138
Operating system
Configuring, 73
Safety instruction, 60
Update, 151
Update using ProSave, 154
Update using WinCC flexible, 153
Operation feedback, 162
Operator control
Memory card slot, 67
MP 277, 65
Operating, 86
Selecting, 86
Operator control options, 81
Optical feedback, 162
Option
Installing, 140, 155
Installing with ProSave, 157
Installing with WinCC flexible, 155
Removing, 140, 155
Removing with ProSave, 158
Removing with WinCC flexible, 156
Options, 28
Network operation, 80, 125
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Overall dimensions
MP 277 10" Key, 254
P
Password, 197
Backing up, 198
Restoring, 198
Specifying, 94
Password list, 197
Password properties, 80, 94
Password protection, 75, 80
Activate, 94
Deactivating, 95
Windows CE taskbar, 75
PC/PPI
Cable, 23
Configuring the cable, 59
Setting the adapter, 59
PELV, 54
Peripheral
Rated load, 61
Permission in remote control, 194
Permissions in remote control, 196
Plant configuration
Non-insolated, 54
PLC
Number of connectable, 29
Protocol, 29
Reading recipe data record, 232, 240
Transferring recipe data record, 234, 241
PLC_User, 206, 207, 208
Ports
MP 277 Key, 257
MP 277 Touch, 255
Power failure, 146
Power supply
Configuration graphic, 53
Connecting, 53, 54
Printer
Configuration graphic, 62
Connecting, 62
Setting properties, 80
Printer connection
Setting, 102
Printer properties, 80, 102
Printing
Labeling strips, 69
Via network printer, 120
Process control phase, 137
Production sequence
Manual, 245
303
Index
PROFIBUS
Setting, 80
PROFIBUS DP
Setting, 113
PROFINET, 119
Addressing, 120
Connecting, 56, 58
PROFINET IO
Disabling direct keys, 117
Enabling direct keys, 117
Releasing, 80
Project
Closing, 208
in ProTool, 139
In WinCC flexible, 139
Offline testing, 145
Operating, 161
Reuse, 139
Testing online, 145
Transferring, 137, 140
Protected trademark, 4
Protection class, 44
Protective foil, 23
Protective measures
Static electricity, 264
Protocol
PLC, 29
Proxy
Server, 79, 125, 127
Setting, 79
R
Radiation
High frequency, 31
Radio interference, 34
Emission, 36
Rated load
Interface, 61
Reading out
Recipe data record, 232, 240
Rear view, 15, 17, 19, 21
Recipe, 218
Control, 219
Data flow, 221
Data record, 219
Field of application, 217
Functional scope, 27
Recipe screen, 222
Recipe view, 222
Synchronizing tags, 231
Recipe data record
304
Creating, 227, 237
Delete, 230, 239
Editing, 229, 238
Entering, 244
Exporting, 242
Importing, 243
Reading from PLC, 232, 240
Synchronize with PLC, 229
Transferring to PLC, 234, 241
Recipe list, 223, 235
Recipe screen, 224
Operating, 227, 237
Overview, 224
Recipe tag
Offline, 226
Online, 226
Synchronizing, 225, 231
Recipe view, 222
Expanded, 222
Operating element, 227
Simple, 223
Recommissioning, 137
Record list, 223, 235
Recycling, 5
Regional and language settings, 80, 97
Regional settings, 97
Registered trademark, 4
Registry information
Backing up, 80
Registry Information
Backing up, 98
Regulations for the prevention of accidents, 31
Remote control
Forcing permission, 194, 196
Start, 194, 195
Removing
Option, 140, 155, 156, 158
Repairs, 248
Reset to factory state, 140, 153, 154
Restore, 79, 131
Restoring, 140, 146, 148, 150, 198
from external storage device, 133
From memory card, 79, 98
With ProSave, 150
With WinCC flexible, 148
Returns Center, 248
Reverse polarity protection, 54
RS-422/RS-485 interface
Configuring, 57
Ruler
Trend view, 187
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Index
S
S7 transfer settings, 80
Dialog, 113
Safe electrical isolation, 54
Safety
Functional scope, 27
Standards, 32
Safety instruction
Backlighting, 100
Changed tag name, 231
Cold restart, 105
Compatibility conflict, 146
Compressed project file, 141
Damage to the HMI device, 49
Data channel, 152
Data loss, 131, 151
Direct key, 164
Electrostatic charge, 263
Equipotential bonding cable, 52
Grounding measures, 264
High frequency radiation, 31
Interface, 61
Keyboard, 66
License key, 146, 152, 155
Loss of data possible, 133
Memory card, first use, 68
Memory distribution, 107
Multi-key operation, 162
Path, 109
Power failure, 146
Preventing inadvertent operation, 247
Project file, 109
Recipe data record in background, 223
Remote control for channel 1, 115
Replacing the HMI device, 60
Storage, 37
Switching info text, 173, 181
Touch screen, 66
Transfer mode, 112, 117
Transfer mode channel 2, 117
Transport, 37
Unintentional action, 66, 176
Unintentional transfer mode, 116
Update operating system., 60
USB host-to-host cable, 60
Working on the control cabinet, 31
Safety regulations, 31
Scaling
Functional scope, 26
Scheduler
Functional scope, 28
Screen
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Functional scope, 26
Screen keyboard, 79, 166
Alphanumerical, 170
Change layout, 83
Character repeat, 89
Configuring, 88
For Control Panel, 82
Keyboard level, 170
Language switching, 170
Numeric, 167
Representation types, 83
Screen saver, 101
Overview of functions, 80
Setting, 100
Screen settings
Changing, 80
Scroll back key, 86, 174
Scroll forward key, 86, 174
Search engine
Internet, 126
Secure mode, 77
Cancel, 77
Security settings, 79
Security system, 197
Selecting
Operator control, 86
Selection list, 172, 180
Open, 86
Service
In the Internet, 5
Service pack, 24
Set up
Network, 119
Secure mode, 77
Setting
Backlighting, 80
Browser, 79
Computer name, 80
Date, 95
Date format, 97
Date/Time, 79
Delay time, 80, 108
DIP switch, 57
Double-click, 91
E-mail, 80
E-mail connection, 125
Language, 165
MPI, 80, 113
Network, 122
Number format, 97
PC/PPI adapter, 59
Printer connection, 102
Printer properties, 80
305
Index
PROFIBUS, 80, 113
PROFINET IO, 80
Proxy, 79
Regional data, 97
Screen saver, 100
Time, 95
Time format, 97
UPS, 80, 109
Volume, 80
Setting language, 165
Setting the time zone, 95
Settings
Internet, 80
Language, 80
Regional, 80
S7-Transfer, 80
Shift key, 87
SHIFT key, 87, 175
Shipping conditions, 37
Shutting down
HMI device, 64
Side view, 14, 16, 18, 20
Siemens HMI input panel options, 79
Simple alarm view, 212
Simple recipe view, 223
Menu command, 236
Operating element, 235
Simple user view, 199
Slider control, 184
[email protected], 13, 28
[email protected] view, 193, 194
Monitoring mode, 193
Usage, 193
[email protected], 13, 28
SMTP server, 125
Software options, 28
Sort order
Alarm view, 213
Specifications
Display, 255, 256
Input device, 255, 257
Memory, 255, 257
MP 277 Key, 256
MP 277 Touch, 255, 256
Ports, 255, 257
Supply voltage, 256, 257
Standard operating system, 13
Start
HMI device, 105
Static electricity
Protective measures, 264
Status / control, 188
Key control, 191
306
Status Force
Touch operation, 189
Storage conditions, 37
storage device
Restoring from external, 133
Storage device
Saving to external, 131
Strain relief, 64
Subnet mask, 122
Supply voltage
MP 277 Key, 257
MP 277 Touch, 256
Switches, 183
Switching on
MP 277, 63
Symbolic value
Changing, 172
Entering, 172
Synchronizing
Date and time, 96
Recipe tag, 225, 231
System, 107
System alarms
Parameters, 265
System information, 80
LED, 107
System properties, 80
Device name, 121
General, 107
Memory, 108
T
TAB key, 86, 174
Tabulator key, 86, 174
Tag
Functional scope, 26
TCP/IP address, 122
Technical Support, 5
Temporary files
Backing up, 98
Test
For environmental conditions, 40
Testing
MP 277, 63
Text box, 167
Character mode, 174
Normal mode, 174
Text list
Functional scope, 26
Time, 79
Entering, 172, 180
Setting, 95
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Index
Synchronizing, 96
Time format, 80, 97
Touch operation
Trend view, 187
Touch screen
Calibrating, 80, 92
Safety instruction, 66
Trademark, 4
Training Center, 5
Transfer, 137, 138, 141
Automatic, 142
Cancel, 63
Manual, 141
Transfer mode
Unintentional, 116
Via MPI, 112
Via PROFIBUS DP, 112
Transfer settings, 115
Channel, 115
Directories, 108
Overview of functions, 80
Transferring
License key, 140, 159
Project, 137, 140
Recipe data record, 234, 241
Transferring back
License key, 140, 160
Transport damage, 45
Trend view, 186
Key control, 188
Touch operation, 187
Trends
Functional scope, 28
Limit violation, 186
U
UL approval, 33
Unintentional action, 66, 162
Unintentional transfer mode, 116
Update
Operating system, 151
Update operating system., 140
Updating
Using ProSave, 154
Using WinCC flexible, 153
UPS
Displaying status, 80
Setting, 80, 109
UPS properties
Configuration, 110
Current status, 111
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
USB device
Connecting, 61
Use
Conditions, 39
In residential areas, 34
Industrial, 34
With additional measures, 39
User data
Backing up, 198
Changing, 206, 207
Restoring, 198
User group, 197
User name, 124
User view, 198
Extended, 199
Simple, 199
Users, 197
Admin, 206, 207, 208
Changing, 202
Creating, key control, 203
Delete, 208
Logoff, 201
Logon, 200
PLC_User, 206, 207, 208
V
Value table
Trend view, 186
VBScript
Functional scope, 28
Volume, 103
Setting, 80
Volume & Sounds Properties, 80
W
Weight
MP 277 Key, 256
Weight of the MP 277 Touch, 255
WinCC flexible
Internet Settings, 80
WinCC flexible internet settings
E-mail, 125
Windows CE taskbar, 74
Password protection, 75
WINS, 122
Server, 120
Working on the control cabinet, 31
307
Index
308
MP 277 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, 03/2009, A5E02479740-01
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement